Home

Gecdis v8

1. A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 3 The Mobile List The mobile list displays the list of all mobiles and fleets and allows you to manage them The corresponding dialog box consists in three parts e Above amenu bar allows you to manage mobiles e On the left the list of all kinds of mobiles i e Ships and each fleet e On the right the mobiles and possibly the trawl net of the selected element in the left hand pane and information about them The pieces of information are gathered into several columns You can sort them out either in ascending or in descending order The menu bar allows you to hide display objects and open the dialog boxes about mobile and fleet dead reckoning appearance and configuration You can also select a mobile centre and display its related information in the Consultation window on the right of the screen To do so you must double click the desired mobile Display Appearance Configuration Centre Track Start Colour iSelect with cursor Real time sort Fleets Name Age Position conning 50G COG sow True ROT Depth Call sign Position a Ships e iXBlue 1 05s 51 02 919 N 001 39 516E 18 0kn 333 0 18 0kn 333 0 51 02 919 N 001 J als ixBlue DR 1h3 50 07 875 N 000 41 264 W 19 4kn 067 7 19 0kn 057 0 50 07 875 N 000 Arpa VJ 415 000000000 30 05 50 59 188 N 001 57 8583E 0 0kn 000 0 50 59 188 N 001 J 415 2350043
2. e H px Ce eer or e i a let MIDNIGHT MERCHANT EE ke SE Te ets d Ae 7 Km EN wm E ah Ke a i wm e E aa d A uf rn ZG ta 4 j s 3 SP 44 Gp arf ee ae ore NG woe Wwe 4 eu 45 S Sh P 4 e Fi T Ai i S Sh P h See c 4 ad Gacy 44 S Sh R adie20 4 sc Figure 24 Printing example 1 4 5 THE MODULES It should be understood that Gecdis is a modular software ie that its features will be dependent on the number of installed and loaded modules according to the license provided with the software As its features are not fixed in advance its interface is evolving accordingly It is for this reason that the sample screens in this manual may not always be in accordance with your system Two types are distinguished module e The cartographic modules that are providers of chart datas They are responsible for their own menus to manage their various parameters and display their data There can only be one active cartographic module In this category are such basic module Planisphere which manages the display of a world map and ENCs evolved module that manages the ECDIS charts KR The available sub menu System Settings Charts Chart Provider allows controller cartographic modules installed and possibly change the module to use e The modules performing various tasks ranging from database management to the management of I O mob
3. l X sL LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual It also has a contextual menu to initialize the text in another format Cursor Copy O 662 fee N 00191957555 E SO S 197635 N 00171192413 E 0 51 58 580 M 001 11 55 445 E S1U 373247 5656500 Figure 8 Geographic editor contextual menu 1 2 3 THE MOUSE Right click Selects enables etc Wheel Increase or reduce current zoom Left click Stops closes etc i Bn Ball Moves the cursor in menus or in the chart Figure 9 Using the Trackball The mouse is a pointing device allowing to operate almost any action on the software It consists of a ball that allows to move the cursor on screen and two or three buttons each of them having a specific use ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 9 x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 3 Gecdis Overview 1 3 1 THE SCREEN aor Title bar ZC SeaXpert Station SeaXpert Folder iXBlue 0 57 061 N Vecteur fond 18 0 kn 098 0 Cap vrai 09 001 34 792 E Vecteur surface 18 0 kn 098 0 Profondeur 39 1 Info bar D System Plot Position passerelle 50 57 061 N 001 34 792 E Vecteur fond 18 0 kn 098 0 Vecteur surface 18 0 kn 098 0 Cap vrai 098 0 Toolbar F i SOW ETA Profondeur 39 0 m Critical info Main view title Info pages Secondary title eS Main view Secondary window
4. HH amp amp SERIAL ENC Fichier ENC a 1 Ko e LO ENC_ROOT xe INFO E O BaseCD_4_WK3410 BaseCD_5_WK3410 D CH BaseCD_6_WK3410 4 BaseCD_7_WK3410 5 Clients Permis H O NewBaseDYD_wk3410 5 primar offre O Sodena AYCS Permis zi Cr er un nouveau dossier Annuler p Figure V 11 Encrypted ENC Cells folder 4 Click OK IF YOU IMPORT NON OFFICIAL DATA A MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED IN THE HIGHER RIGHT SIDE OF THE SCREEN o ALSO IF YOU LOAD THE CORRUPTED DATA CELLS ARE REJECTED V 2 3 2 Importing a catalog of non encrypted ENC cells To import a catalogue 1 Click Import Catalogue 2 Locate the ENC_ROOT folder select the CATALOG 031 file and then click OK ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 109 IXSLUuUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Select ENC Catalogue File Regarder dans ENC_ROOT J ck Mes documents r cents Bureau e Mes documents Wr a Poste de travail Favoris r seau Nom du fichier Fichiers de type CATALOG 031 pi ENC Catalogue Files Catalog 031 sl k Figure V 12 Importing a catalog V 2 3 3 Importing one or several ENC cells You can import S57 file Click Import Cells 2 Select i 110 one file and click Import or a folder and click Import Folder Select ENC Cell Files fe Mes documents r cents e Bureau o Mes documents P er Ta Foste de tra
5. ccccccesseeeccceesecceceeeceeeaeeeeeseaneees 45 ee i N a R E E E E E E 182 L leeway angle 84 Et 63 Leeway track noknon swsuaneeseseinees 63 list of mobiles OPENIN eege 67 Leto te ie 67 Te 85 Gecdis v8 User s Manual M Man Over e e E 18 MAMMA AULOP NO EE 164 Mark e Il TE 171 Mark ee 172 Menu TEE 10 IVT CPA E E es 69 la e PE PE AEE EE E ET 18 elei 93 le PUNO WE 93 EEN 68 GEI 93 dead reckoned inisisssisrirsiirsieasisisriesinedaniran iinne nae ciarid inanan 93 MOE ea 67 FER 74 AS LEE 75 specific appearance cccccssssecccceesecceceeeeceeseeeeeeesseeeeeeees 79 ARII E 74 nl EE 80 ee 75 Mobile dead TEEN ggegeun eege deen gege deeg 101 mobile and Sensor synthesis essennesseenesssensssrenssreersssreres 98 Mobile appearance s sosssesesssenessreressreressreressrrresssrressrerees 74 Mobile WSU E 67 mobiles K Ba E 93 Mobiles Sn ee ee ee tT ern rere rr eT or 77 ARPA winsassavonsaiscsennassandennsdasectwseatoannaesensawdssebenwasiwenvadsneesaneas 77 Mobiles EU EE 69 N Navigation TASKS roinneann 22 NNE A r E E A 82 O objet cartographique SUF SSIOM E 119 objet ponctuel cartographique ccccccssseececeeseeeeeeeesees 119 Opening I SESSION E 34 GRESCHNER tesseninterscninvenseciaaciandspospaeiadoamalteantelasouand 65 e 183 CDV GIG Een 10 Own Ship GER 69 i SING E 17 65 E E 65 GE 65 Own Ship alarms Cle INS en E 69 inconsistent depths aisassisessadacvadsassivievadsaedareasicaareteiene
6. Quality of data Deleted Coverage Deleted Navigational system of marks Deleted Quality of data Inserted Coverage Inserted Navigational system of marks Inserted Underwater awash rock Deleted Underwaterfawash rock Deleted Underwaterfawash rock Deleted Depth area Deleted Magnetic variation Deleted Depth contour Inserted Magnetic variation Inserted Depth area Inserted Depth area Inserted Underwater awash rock Inserted Underwater awash rock Inserted Underwaterfawash rock Inserted Figure V 14 Import report To display the detail of a cell select a cell The list of the cell s user objects display with the action that has been performed on each object The action can be e Inserted the object has been inserted e Modified the object has been modified The modification can change either the geometry of the object or its attributes e Deleted the object has been deleted Select one of the object and the main view is centred on it If you have selected an object tagged Inserted the Imported Feature dialog box displays giving details on the object At this step you can Accept Update or Rejected updates are applied but they are annotated as rejected If you Reject Update have rejected an update you can reconsider your action until the Chart database window has not been closed and no other import operation has been launched To do so select the update and click Accept update Annotate object The annotation is dis
7. Create Predefined Event Create Area Create Line Create Spline Create Circle Create Sector Create Text Figure VII 23 Defined Marks menu 6 To insert the mark click the name of this template and insert it clicking wherever in the main view The mark is automatically selected You can then use the context sensitive buttons to manage it VII 5 2 CONFIGURING MARK DISPLAY OPTIONS By default when you insert a mark only its symbol is displayed You may want to display other elements like its depth Comments vw Display comments v Outline comments Hide symbol if a comment is set Depths vw Display depths vw Outline depths vw Hide symbol if a depth is set Use large mark symbols aaa RE OK Cancel Apple Figure VII 24 Mark display options dialog To configure the mark display options 1 Click Systems Settings User Objects and Mark Display Options 2 Inthe Comments zone of the Mark Display Options dialog box do one of the following e Check the Display comments box if you want to display comments you may have entered while creating a mark e Check the Outline comments box to highlight the mark comments if displayed in the main view e Check the Hide symbol if a comment is set box if you want to hide the symbol for which you have indicated a symbol 3 Inthe Depths zone e Check the Display depths box if you want to display depths you may have entered while creating a mark Check the Outl
8. Areas 7 Display Hide X lt Delete Export New Folder Folders Created Centre lt Ship i CH Marks 4 GI Areas 5 D gt Tracks 6 CH Routes 2 Deleted Objects e Clearing Line Clearing Line Clearing Line e Clearing Line e Clearing Line e Clearing Line Sector 22 01 2009 15 10 41 22 01 2009 15 10 19 22 01 2009 14 57 30 22 01 2009 14 57 23 20 01 2009 15 58 27 16 01 2009 16 20 35 16 01 2009 15 28 52 51 07 526 N 51 06 255 N 51 08 292 N 51 07 442 N 50 58 764 N 50 58 287 N 51 00 243 N Figure VI 4 Clearing Lines in database To edit a clearing line 1 Do one of the following e Select the clearing line you want to edit and click the Properties context sensitive button on the right of the screen e Select the clearing line you want to edit right click it and click Properties in the pop up menu 2 field 2 Click OK 142 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 001 21 489 E 001 20 023 E 000 52 517 E 000 S8 384 E 001 38 247 E 001 28 406 E 001 23 476 E In the Bearing Line dialog box enter a position in the Position field and enter a bearing in the Bearing fll h F D AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Position 5 L200 S6208N 001 21 44190E9bS Bearing 04r 40 1 9217 NM OK Cancel Figure VI 5 Clearing Lines properties To delete a clearing line 1 Doone of
9. oom 10 Charts Colour Mode Erde Mode Hide All User Obj vw True Vectors User Objects Groups Gecdis v8 User s Manual EZ Chrl F2 Ctrlt Fs F3 F4 Chart Display Mode A vg Atomatic F Chart Informations Fixed Usage V Chart Objects d Fixed Cell w Planisphere In Background F Figure V 27 Access to Fixed Cell dialog 2 Selecta cell Fixed Cell Name l Edition cB100001 SC GE1o0002 12 12 G61004011 3 0 GB104102 1 5 GEZ00000 1 2 IT100360 1 6 Er Show only visible cells Usage Scale Issue Date Application Lett Overview 1 325 000 05 12 2005 o2 03 2004 Overview 1325000 05 12 2005 16 12 2003 Overview 1 S500 000 o1f 08 2005 oz 03 2004 Overview 10000000 21 09 2005 21 09 2005 Overview 1S 500 000 29 07 2005 13 10 2004 General 1 500 000 30 11 2005 14 02 2005 DOIT Overview 14200000 26 07 2005 o4 10 2004 2 Select Cancel Figure V 28 Fixed Cell dialog to select cell V 2 11 2 7 Create a punctual object To create a punctual object 1 In the Charts menu point to Manual Updates and then select New Ponctual object The Point Creation window is displayed 120 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 KC L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Point creation x Cell BESANT WN Object da Position Sa Object name oOo O O Dates From fozjogzoi0 xi Eo fozjogjz010 x Annotation zi Ce a Figure V 29
10. 146 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 D d A L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Removes all bearings and radar range circles that have been added with the Piloting Fix dialog box Other bearings made with the Bearing option for example are not removed Bearings are removed Piloting Fix New line of position Landmark position T Ownship position 7 51 49 124 N 004 05 041 E UTC of measure 07 10 03 Pip JV Bearing line Add I Range marker Fix point Bearing Fix Point Range Set EP Figure VI 11 The Piloting Fix Dialog Box To make a fix point 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Piloting fix The Piloting fix dialog box is displayed the Own Ship Position field indicates the coordinates of the Own Ship 2 Click Pip when you want to measure 3 Doone of the following e To make a bearing check the Bearing box e To measure a radar range check the Range marker box 4 Click Fl and then the main view to specify a position for the landmark 5 The position of the landmark and the bearing and or radar range are specified Optionally change those two values 6 Click Add to take into account the observation 7 Do the same for the other bearings radar ranges 8 Optionally insert the fixed point delete all bearings radar ranges or set an EP 9 Click Close to close the dialog box To delete a bearing 1 Right click the beari
11. 3 Click OK VII 3 3 PLANNING A ROUTE Planning a route aims at estimating the duration and speed of your journey To calculate the ETA Estimated Time of Arrival for each waypoint you just need to indicate one of the ETA or the date of departure You can also decide to fix an ETA or a leg speed so that this piece of information remains unchanged To plan a route 1 Indicate at least one estimated time of arrival ETA Check one of the boxes of the ETA column click the cell and enter an estimated time or use the up and down arrows to select a date 2 ETA and leg speed for each leg are automatically calculated according to the ETA you have indicated in the previous step If you have entered a date without checking the cell the date will not be taken into account by the computation ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 161 X 8a LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 3 You can enable any constraints to your route checking boxes of the ETA or Leg Speed fields and entering in front of the boxes your desired ETA for the waypoint or leg speed for the previous leg Name Route Comment Waypoints Nr Name Position ETA Leg Speed Comment IS 00039444E E 11 07 2013 i 2 50 38 132 N 000 35 650 E Il 11 07 2013 08 18 28 18 0 kn E 50 S7 661 N 000 30 139 E TT 11 07 2013 08 30 19 18 0 kn 4 50 35 855 N 000 19 175E Il 11 07 2013 05 54 22 AA Y OK Cancel Figure VII 9 Route planning dialog VII 3 4 DUP
12. Track Symbol Label Fasttrack Vectors Miscellaneous wd Misible SCAMIN vw ECDIS representation 1000000 vw Display Radar Antenna vw Use outline OK Cancel Figure IV 13 Configuring the Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Symbols To define the mobile and fleet general appearance 1 Click Mobile and then Appearance The Mobile Appearance dialog box is displayed You have to use it in a progressive way Indeed you will have to check or not boxes and each choice you will make will have consequences on your future choices The following is an example of the complete thought you may have 2 Inthe Symbol tab click Visible if you want your mobile to be visible in the main view e If you haven t checked Visible you won t be able to see the mobile e lf you have checked Visible 3 Select ECDIS representation if you want the mobile to be represented as indicated in the ECDIS standard e If you have checked ECDIS representation the mobiles will be represented as indicated in the ECDIS standard e f you haven t checked ECDIS representation 4 Select a colour and a symbol clicking on the arrow of these zones and check the Expanded box if you want your mobile to be expanded see IV 5 2 page 76 oun SCAMIN is the abbreviation for scale minimum When you check this box you indicate that the ko mobile or fleet will not be displayed after the scale that is defined in the zone below this check box For example if 100000 is indicated you won
13. as GE 4 IN Status bar BEE Ce 18 44 41 B 45 38435 N 007 19730 E 16 44 30 Own Ship ne Afs DR difference 37 16 NM V ACK Alarm bar Figure 1 10 The Workspace Gecdis consists of several windows and bars The main view The menu bar Title bars Toolbars Information windows Secondary windows Chart Overview Pilot consultation etc And other specific windows Alarms dialogs 1 3 1 1 The main view This is the area s largest map display application Allows displaying several layers of information the user can select e g chart user objects mobiles radar data The main view enables to display several types of information layers that the user can select e Chart e User objects e Mobiles ownship target datas provided by the sensors available onboard radar trawl system Sensors e Additional data provided by commercial databases current bathymetry sediments oceano 1 3 1 2 The menu bar Gecdis is a Windows based software containing different menus System Display Mobile Navigation User Objects Radar View F Figure 1 11 The menu bar 10 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Here is the list of the basic menus and their use This list can increase depending on your options Radar Oceanography etc Mobile Navigation User Centre on Gwn Ship F2 Orientation t Relative motion Ctrl
14. height of tide 29 E 2 KE Increase the mobile s height of tide This mobile is one that is currently selected or the ownship if none is selected Only if this information is configured on an estimated source ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 7 di L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SE NSES e st B OOOO wwo Reduce the window zoom Enlarge the window zoom Inverse the zoom window Print the main view so S pS ES i Move the mobile position of the relative motion 1 2 2 ENTERING TEXTS Text can be entered to define several elements e A position e Numerical characters heading speed distance date e Free text In some cases text is entered in a controlled way So when a specific kind of character is to be entered it is not possible to enter another one For example if the character should be a number it is not possible to enter an alphabetical character Likewise while editing a heading you won t be able to enter a value which is superior to 359 9 1 2 2 1 Geographic editor As this editor allows you to enter a position in any format the validity of characters entered is not monitored in real time but at the end of the entry The geographical editor is special because it has a button with a cross to use the mouse in a geographic view to set the new position S0 S1 97633N O01 1h 92413E P Figure I 7 Geographic editor 8 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013
15. 7 Select with cursor Real time sort Fleets Ve Age SOG COG CPA On Poston Lk ships beni 30s 29 6kn ois 119 Os 51 04 894 N 001 20 365 E Gas Cibleoz 20s 31 0kn 199 4 1 22 Os 51 04 508 N 001 20 957 E Arpa Cibleos LOs 35 0kn 194 7 1 23 Os 51 03 962 N 001 21 295 E Oe 12 05 40 7kn 200 2 1 18 Os 51 03 552 N 001 21 169 E cbleo5 s 426kn 200 2 1 07 Os 51 03 169 N 001 20 630 E Cibleas 10 05 42 2kn 194 8 1685m Os 51 03 050 N 001 19 903 E bleo 90s 324kn 196 1 1352m Os 51 03 176 N 001 19 029 E Oe 80s 320kn 187 7 1296m Os 51 03 532 N 001 18 428 E cbeo 7 05 29 8kn 195 3 1500m Os 51 04 053 N 001 18 098 E S Se EES EEN 14 27 12 B 51 03 863 N 001 19 371 E 12 25 38 4 Own Ship Inconsistent position with Figure IL 21 The Chart Overview ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 959 60 A L_ LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Chart 2 allows to display close another main view with the same scale toggle command You can resize this second window and it can be used to display another type of information e g for oceanographic use When your cursor moves into this window its position is represented in the main view Critical Information allows to open a submenu to critical information window management See 1 3 1 6 page 12 Custom Information allows to open a submenu to display close the informa
16. 7 3 9 249 8 3 9 18 2 9 4 3 20 1 10 0 0 20 1 11 4 3 20 1 12 3 9 18 2 13 3 9 A9 14 8 7 0 4 15 14 9 0 4 16 14 9 4 4 17 6 2 4 4 18 3 lt 1 7 3 19 0 0 7 3 END ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 205 Q DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES A ACOUISILION vn e 95 96 Active tee e EE 40 adding piece of informatio sicsssvnccavcassssapsdvncsaveasaasareavnaneedaevasedeade 94 DP STS E A EA E A A T 88 Adding a COM port wisscsucacsdsoaceesvssaetectnadersvdousniadenadeusieanseieves 86 adding a user 33 Adding information to a mobile 94 ee ELE EE 85 PS NOON E 77 Ee 93 Alarm tutelle EE 55 Alarms configuration cseccccceessececeeesececeeeeeceesueeeeeesuaeeessuaeeeeees 32 Allowed CPA E 69 AUG ao chawsasncdaivveunedanndsuetuvnsnbesannddinadabnasibadannddndiannsabaswenddensss 85 apparent WiNd E 86 GENEE 64 ene e 77 B Back up data 37 GITT TEE 140 Bearing range line cceeeccccceseecceceesececceeeecessueeeeesueeeeeees 140 Ela ul EE 55 DNASE NE1 SW ciciscencatsscatssenasacencesacesianssensskeanotesesapeuenneiactdcnteds 85 C CAlCU ATION RE 95 centring viel IC 68 Centring adding a DIAC epinar rer ine AEE EEA E 49 editing ET 50 al gig EN 49 on any MODE erasian i 51 ON Own Ship eessssssssesssssenssssrrsssrrressrrerssrrerssrrrrsserressrerees 51 removing a place sisirin iiciin an i anian 50 Channel view 60 CHEA EEN 60 elle Perene aa sean cetieaan d
17. A Rechercher L 4 Dossiers Adresse L O1XO1 G em Nom i aom S ey Lt JEM Boot CINFO V O1X01 G a SERIAL ENC S lectionnez un l ment pour obtenir une description Figure V 10 Encrypted ENC Cells set of files The cells of commercial distributors can be encrypted or not if they are directly provided by your hydrographic office 2 Click Import Commercial Exchange Set 3 Inthe dialog box select the CD ROM that contains the desired charts and select e The folder containing a file SERIAL ENC and a folder EN ROOT or e The folder containing a file MEDIA TXT and several folders containing a subfolder EN ROOT In our example below the folder that must be selected is one on those entitled BaseCD_ since it contains the file SERIAL ENC as well as the ENC ROOT folder If you had selected the ENC ROOT the import process wouldn t start Rechercher un dossier l 2lsl Select a 563 exchange set folder This Folder can be either 4 Folder containing a file SERIAL ENC and a folder ENC_ROOT 4 folder containing a file MEDIA TXT and several folders containing a subfolder ENC_ROOT Poste de travail Se Disque local CC Se data D S Disque amovible E e Disque amovible G oe e Disque amovible H Kal ENC_ROOT 4 Lecteur DYD I Bi Lecteur DVD RAM J e e Disque amovible E CJ INFO S ENCs sur Primar 2 O BaseCD_1_Wk3410 O BaseCD_2_WK3410
18. Gecdis vS User s Manual NM SSESE esiait a Rame RER GE Cum ne oo Lafe T ia Yi SMe annt A Ef Zei Wes mme A 7 VI _ fer IX3 LUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Revision History ISD M 038 A EN 12 07 2013 ECDIS software user manual ISD M 038 B EN pn 12 11 2013 Appendix D rewrite Copyright All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means whether electronic printed manual or otherwise including but not limited to photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose without prior written permission of iXBlue Disclaimer iXBlue specifically disclaims all warranties either expressed or implied included but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with respect to this product and documentation iXBlue reserves the right to revise or make changes or improvments to this product or documentation at any time without notify any person of such revision or improvments In no event shall iXBlue be liable for any consequential or incidental damages including but not limited to loss of business profits or any commercial damages arising out of the use of this product Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Int
19. Leeway angle VBW OSD Drift soeed amp course e VDR S OSD Depth e DRE iXSea PIXSE HSPOS S DBS SEASCAN PSAP DBK Dag Submersion i SPIXSE POSITI GNS PIXSE GPSIN SPIXSE GP2IN __ SE E USB EN Altitude GGA i SPIXSE POSITI GNS PIXSE GPSIN VDO PIXSE GP2IN i SPIXSE USBIN _ Swaying speed amp course e S ROT m ROT VDO Rolling PHOTONETICS PHTRO Pitching JRC SPJRCD iXSea SPIXSE ATITUD iXSea SPIXSE HSATIT Heaving iXSea PHLIN iXSea SPIXSE HEAVE IXSea SPIXSE HSATIT ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 i L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Run distance Run distance daily Roughness el SEASCAN SPSAP Status target Battery votae Je Horizontal accuracy GST iXSea SPIXSE HSPOS GSA iXSea SPIXSE STDPOS GGA GNS Vertical accuracy GST iXSea SPIXSE HSPOS GSA iXSea SPIXSE STDPOS D 4 4 TRAWL NET INFORMATIONS Position S GEONET PTSAG GEONET PTSAL SIMRAD ITI TPT SIMRAD ITI TPR Warp length MARELEC MA MARELEC MA DD SIMRAD ITI WWL Submersion e DBS GEONET PTSAG S GEONET PTSAL SIMRAD SPSIMP SIMRAD ITI TPT SIMRAD ITI TPR SIMRAD ITI DBS Hardness SEASCAN SPSAP JRC SPJRCS Vertical soread SCANMAR HBF SIMRAD ITI HFB Rolling el GEONET PTSAG Horizontal spread GEONET PTSAG GEONET PTSAN SCANMAR TDS SIMRAD SPSIMP SIMRAD ITI TDS NN ISD M 038 B EN 12 11
20. OK Cancel Apply Figure IV 19 Configuring the Specific Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Labels 8 Check or uncheck the Uses default appearance box depending on whether you want to use or not the default appearance that you have defined for the mobiles e If you have checked the Uses default appearance box The default appearance that you have defined in the Appearance sub menu will be defined e f you haven t checked the Uses default appearance box 9 Check the Visible box if you want the label of the mobile of your fleet to be visible e If you haven t checked Visible you won t be able to see the label of your ship e lf you have checked Visible 10 Check the Transparent box if you want labels to be transparent if you don t select Transparent the label will be highlighted 11 When finished configuring the fleet click OK g You can follow the same steps to create a specific appearance for a mobile clicking Mobile Mobile List selecting the mobile and Appearance ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 81 x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6Configuration IV 6 1 INFORMATION IV 6 1 1 System Information System information is data concerning elements that are related to your machine The cursor information the stream information and the UTC are defined as system information e System gives you data about your machine e UTC identifies the date time piece of information that is used by
21. Refresh UA Aca IEE ez iBlue Add Delete Close Figure IV 39 Controlling a Piece of Information Is liable to change It gives the value of the selected piece of information and indicates the state of this piece of data Undefined Invalid Valid High quality 26 05 2002 15 02 56 Gives the UTC of data provided with information or it s timestamp when the value of the information has been obtained Acquisition TimeOut Gives the same value as defined in the Source tab in the above dialog box no acquisition timeout has been entered Elapsed Time from Refresh Defines the refreshing time i e the interval between two updates of the selected piece of information Acq Gives the elapsed time since last acquisition of the value for this piece of information IV 6 5 3 Correction tab The Correction tab allows you to locate exactly the position of your ship Indeed your sensors will certainly not be located exactly at the same location as the conning position and the conning position is taken into account to locate the position of the ship For a mobile the corrections will be used especially for the depth and position parameters For a fleet the corrections may concern radars This tab is only available when the Basic mode button is not pressed My GP52 a Source Checking Corrections Filtering ff Position cae UTC of position reference L iti fi p i f Position SE i Sos i cos Positioning ad
22. The default ones are as follows The cursor position The bearing from the Own Ship to the cursor The distance from the Own Ship to the cursor The TTG from the Own Ship to the cursor The ETA from the Own Ship to the cursor The CPA from the Own Ship to the cursor You can also add information about depth and height of tide in the location of the cursor To do so select one of the system s pieces of information click Add select Information and click the piece of information you want to add You cannot delete one of the default cursor s piece of information 8 When the cursor is outside the main view in a dialog box or one of the bars cursor s pieces of information are displayed in red and are considered as undefined except the position which is considered as invalid and indicates the position of the centre of the screen System s pieces of information are as follows UTC software acquired Universal Time Coordinated This corresponds to Greenwich time in England This piece of information is dependent to time lag Time lag Dead reckoned The lag between the UTC and the local time time of reference that it software acquired is possible to configure If time lag is generated from a software source the time of reference will be the time lag of your system If time lag is acquired it will be defined by the time lag entered on the GPS sensor Local time Software This piece of information is displayed whenever time
23. 001 50 E PRINT SETTINGS ixBlue replace ixBlue DE V ACK 4 3 In this mode the top menu bar and toolbars are hidden 11 9 2 2 1 Controls This bottom menu is controlled by the mouse and keyboard Horizontal displacements Performs the selected command or call another menu if the text is underlined Exits the menu to perform an action with the mouse in another window acknowledge an alarm for example Changes the current menu by returning to the previous or jumping to the next if the first level Right button ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 41 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Following are the item states Unselected Here is unselected command Central clic or Home key to return Figure II 23 Inactive menu after pressing Home Figure Il 24 Inactive menu after opening a dialog When the menu loses focus if the operator presses the Home key or a command opens a dialog box for example it changes appearance to indicate inactivity In this case to return to the menu press the Home key the middle click or close the dialog box 11 9 2 2 2 Main menus lt gt WARNING THESE MAY CHANGE DEPENDING ON THE MODULES AND SOFTWARE LICENSE PROVIDES Following are the main menus st 1 1 menu gt gt ZOOM lt lt gt ZOOM lt lt ZOOM gt lt lt WINDOW gt gt OWNSHIP NAVIGATION PRINT SETTINGS QUIT nd 2 2 menu NIGHT DUSK REL MOTION LEG
24. 12 11 2013 ln pf x pf x ln pf x nl nl nl nl nl nl pf x pf x px nl nl nl nl nl nl nl nl nl pf x pf x Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES JJ OT JJ PM RSA X X Rudder sensor angle X X RSD Radar system data Routes IXMRoutes a AIS ship static data sis EE SS DEI True heading and status Target latitude and longitude DF Tracked target message i Dual ground water speed ss AIS VHF data link message see D 2 TEL ma TM BW VDM VDO AIS VHF data link own vessel report see D 2 VDR Set and drift lt HW Water speed and heading Dual ground water distance Kc lt LW VSD AIS voyage static data VTG X X X X X X X X X Course over ground and ground speed X X VWR Relative apparent wind speed and angle VWT True wind speed and angle Waypoint closure velocity IXMRoutes Waypoint location IXMRoutes X Cross track error measured IXMRoutes Time and date AZU Time UTC Other than IXMloMobile X WCV WPL x TE N DA N LZ X X X Here is the list of binary AIS messages encapsulated in the sentence NMEA VDM VDO used in Gecdis PB Addressed binary message ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 195 s sl LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ITU R M1371 gas Safety related broadcast message 18 Standard Class B equipment position report 19 Extended Class B eq
25. 20 00 mi B Bridge Keel height 12 00 m d d D Extreme draught D gt More Close Figure IV 5 Own Ship s heights T Total height The total height of your ship B Bridge Keel The height between bridge and keel of your ship height D Extreme draught The maximum value you can assign to your ship s draught If draught is superior to the one specified an alarm is generated IV 2 3 NAVIGATION PARAMETERS The Navigation tab changes some of the routes parameters Own Ship Characteristics i Sizes Heights Navigation 30 Model AIS Turn radius 100 00 m Economic speed Maximum speed 40 00 kn Maximum TE 1000 0 m Safety Distance 1500 0 m More Close Figure IV 6 Own Ship s navigation parameters Turn radius The radius of the Own Ship when it turns while in route monitoring Economic speed The default soeed of the Own Ship for each leg of a route Maximum Speed The maximum speed that cannot be exceeded in route planning matters Maximum XTE The maximum error that defaults on the legs of a route WM Explanatory and cinematic pieces of information about the Own ship are available and can be SN observed in a resizable HT ML typed window For this click More button Normally information comes from the ship s RPC Registre de pr paration au combat register of preparation to fighting It is summed up in the ixm I XMIoMobile Ownship html file 66 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013
26. 225 degrees if the boat suddenly stops the wind will be at the full 7 07 Knots come from the port quarter of the vessel 225 degrees from the bow 64 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Ds L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 2The Own Ship You can assign several mobiles to your ship e g the one representing your GPS and the other one dead reckoning The Own Ship with upper cases is the main representation of this ship that will be taken as the reference For example when a mobile is defined as the Own Ship you will only be able to create an event for this one To assign a mobile as the Own Ship lt gt YOU CAN DEFINE SEVERAL MOBILES FOR YOUR SHIP BUT ONLY ONE MOBILE WILL BE DEFINED AS THE a OWN SHIP 1 Click Mobile and then Mobile List 2 Inthe list of mobiles click a mobile Own Ship To set the parameters of your Own Ship gr IT IS IMPORTANT TO SET THE CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR SHIP 1 Click System Settings I O and Mobiles and then Own Ship Characteristics 2 Inthe Own Ship Characteristics dialog box set the parameters to change the default information with information relative to your ship IV 2 1 SIZES The Sizes tab allows you to configure the size of the Own Ship If you click Outline filename a list of example files is displayed An example file can define very accurate measurements for your ship You can change an outline file a If you want to create a s
27. An example of a cell syntax is GB4X01NE where e GB is the producer code e 4 is the navigational purpose overview general coastal approach harbour or berthing In the present example 4 defines the coastal navigational purpose e XO1NE is the area described by the cell Edition the cell s edition and update ENC s creation 1 is assigned as a value for this field Each time a cell is edited the edition number increases by 1 Usage navigational purpose for which ENC data has been compiled by the IHO Scale scale in which the chart objects have been compiled When the information is displayed at a larger scale than that contained in the ENC the indication Overscale displays Issue Date date of publication and availability of a cell Application date date to which the update becomes available Center on Cell To centre the chart area on the cell you have selected in the list See V 2 7 Import Commercial To import encrypted ENC cells See V 2 3 1 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 107 4 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Reset Database Delete all the cells The database is thus moved to recycle bin See V 2 6 DK2KATGN2 0070405 3B20CE9C3 2 0DF0E83B20CE9C3 20DFOESTBTSLOFS7O7D4ALLO DKZSUNDT20070405557FEBLOET4 ZOE ZER 5 7FEBLOET4 ZOE 7442 6BFC3 S444 48660 History Reports the actions done on the cells 2 points of view e Cell by cell Charts tab e Operation
28. Entrances to Rivers in Guyana and Suriname 25 05 26 Scale 1 000 17 02121 vertices 53 04 022 N 001 11 886 E Cromer to Smiths Knoll RC1 28 10 21 SE Si Approaches to the River Humber BCL 30 09 21 SSC S ea pore Approaches to The Wash BC 21 10 26 53 04 022 N 002 21 878 E River Humber and the Rivers Ouse and Trent BCL 22 06 2 Westkapelle to Stellendam and Maasvlakte BCL 23 12 21 Berwick upon Tweed to the Farne Islands RC1 28 11 21 Terschellinger Gronden to Harlingen RCI 14 09 21 Moray Firth RCL 30 12 21 232i xl howe De a FTIN ot Open Figure V 51 Charts and Chart Panels To open the Chart List dialog box 1 Click the Charts menu and then Chart Catalogue To sort a column in the list of charts 1 Click the name of the column you want to sort In the column you have just sorted an up arrow is displayed in case of an ascending sort and a down arrow Is displayed in case of a descending sort To centre the main view on a panel 1 Inthe Chart Database dialog box select one of the charts of the Chart List pane The first panel of the chart is selected by default In the Panel List pane select the panel you wish to display 2 Click OK V 3 2 2 Installing Uninstalling Charts Charts are gathered into 11 CD ROMs After installing permits you will have to install your desired chart CDs on your hard drive in the same location as configured when launching the ARCS module for the first time When you install
29. ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 145 amp x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VI 4Piloting fix VI 4 1 OVERVIEW Nowadays GPS is often used to specify ships position even if shore is in sight But this might fail to work and you might wish to test the reliability of such a system comparing it to fixes displayed with a bearing line or a range marker A bearing is the angle of a direction e g a landmark to the ship s axis The position of the ship can be estimated when several bearings are operated The ship will be located in the location where two bearings cross and in the crossing area of three bearings You can also estimate the position with a radar range A circle whose centre is the position of the landmark and the radius is the distance measured by the radar between the ship and the landmark will be displayed You can use bearings at the same as a radar range Bearings are often performed with landmarks in other words near coasts A bearing is a half line whose origin is the position of the landmark Gecdis allows you to operate bearings or radar ranges e From several landmarks at different times e From a single landmark at different times As the observations are performed at different times they are transferred in accordance with ship s kinematics The transfer starts from the reference position of the Own Ship from GPS or dead reckoned Once the bearings radar ranges
30. LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual See V 3 2 1 page 134 to manage the ARCS chart database ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 21 LA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Navigation Tasks 1 6 1 OVERVIEW Navigation consists in four basic tasks e Voyage planning e Positioning e Sterring e Monitoring 1 6 2 VOYAGE PLANNING When you plan a voyage you prepare it Le you define calculate and optimise the route You also have to prepare your charts insertion updating e Route planning e Chart calculation e Chart planning 1 6 2 1 Route Planning Route planning allows you to modify an existing route or create a new one A route is defined by the following elements Position of each waypoint Turn radius for each waypoint Safe water calculation based on Safety limits Lane for each leg cross track error Information is available e Alarm window to alert operator e The consultation window to have information on the route when selected e Pilot window Customisation e Information windows allow to display your desired pieces of information e The toolbar allows to insert the buttons that correspond to your needs 1 6 2 2 Route Calculation Route calculation for voyage planning includes the following Calculation of the profile of the route Distance between consecutive waypoints Course between waypoints Wheel over calculation Total distance Estimated time for voyag
31. T U This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 AIDS AND SERVICES PRS T U and 5 52 Edition 3 4 F lights and recommended tracks A rA sA gx 090 deg 090 deg SE EE lt 370deq Se Z R Fog signals CA w A A O 211 deg P FICS 123 5s 5 radio radar 265 deg _ F Q O Os S Reowes 12m iM T services Pit Name FIR 35 e S i Fa O a a a pilot boarding place vacht harbour marina Figure C 9 Chart 1 screen 9 C 9 Buoys and beacons Q This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 BUOYS AND BEACONS Q and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Buoys GL GO GO OO Aa aA 4 A JI a LI eo d Beacons A fA l 1 A LL P I L L LA amp GF F ga Daymarks Light float and light vessel Navigational system of marks g L g y g Vu E T D A B A B A aN d b GE d GE gt gt lt b q no or other system Figure C 10 Chart 1 screen 10 192 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual C 10 Topmarks Q This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 TOPMARES 0 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Buoys Topmarks No at x T mea m mg best ben 4 mo Err ms o ben dine m Hee Figure C 11 Chart 1 screen 11 C 11 Coulor test diagram This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 COULOR TEST DIAGRAM and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Figure C 12 Chart 1 screen 12 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 193 4 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER
32. it acts as a mobile licence configuration HDT HeaDing True sentence that defines heading information Heading to Steer Heading that should be followed by the ship to reach the next wheel over or waypoint This value refers to the geographical north and moves in the same way as the Own Ship s heading Head up Chart orientation that depends on the Own Ship s heading and is always turned to the top of the screen Heaving Vertical movement of the ship on water surface Height of Tide The vertical distance at any moment between the water level and chart datum Horizontal Datum An area of uniform horizontal datum IHO International Hydrographic Office Organization created in 1948 by the United Nations This is the first international organism only devoted to maritime issues OMI mainly tries to improve maritime security and prevent from maritime pollution provoked by ships A line on a map joining points on the bed of the sea or other body or water situated at an equal vertical distance beneath the surface Latitude Scale of distance from Ecuador to north or south graduated from O to 90 degrees Leeway angle Difference between heading and the leeway track Leg Section of a route that links two points A route can be made of several sections Licence Proof of the lawful use of the software Log Device allowing to measure ship s speed from run distance during a certain time Long Time Tags Time interval between
33. true heading depth configured on an automatic source Generally to receive data it must be checked add and configure the stream where the sensors are connected Z Input Output Summary Basic mode Realtime Print Input Output Summary basic Calc System Yalue Source Stream rate UTC 19 06 2013 10 04 53 Software Distance Own Ship Cursor x xxxxNM Software Bearing Own Ship Cursor Ono Software TTG Own Ship Cursor HE Software ETA Own Ship Cursor EIEEE Software CPA Own Ship Cursor x oe Software gt Calc inBlue Value Source Stream Ee Position DOG OGN 001 26 295E lt 4ubomatic gt lt 4utomatic St 16 On lt Aubomatic lt 4ubomatic COG 116 8 lt 4utomatic lt 4uEomatic sow Ip Okn lt Automatic lt 4ucomatic True heading 116 8 Automatic gt Automatic Depth 46 3m lt Aubomatic lt 4uEomatic Figure 1 21 Default Own Ship configuration 1 4 2 ECDIS AND ECS MODES By a single mouse click Gecdis allows you to skip from ECS Electronic Chart System which is a non ECDIS mode to ECDIS mode For this you can use the command in the View menu or use the default button sets in the horizontal toolbar Wei Looking at the menu item corresponding to the command or button in the toolbar you can determine the software mode if a check is present the ECDIS mode is active otherwisethe software is in ECS mode Switching to ECDIS mode brings several changes in the display of geographical views an
34. water A WC L GG Figure C 6 Chart 1 screen 6 190 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES C 6 Traffic routes M TRAFFIC ROUTES M 090 deg 27eg DW MO kg em mmm emm em wm gd traffic separation scheme archipelagic sea lane eee q Gecdis v8 User s Manual This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 ape aa tin T SE O90 deg zgrdko DW Crier El VW ke AA seabed area a wi A wi ee AA 4 UL two way route park C 7 Special areas N SPECIAL AREAS NI Ferry route Zeimen Figure C 7 Chart 1 screen 7 This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 ae ae DEE et Se T EE Wl a H A E PL F 8 p H s 1 Vi aal ORE L DS IE SOE E anchorage area restricted area anchoring prohibitedrestricted area Fishing prohibited rrrr r eS k Eg Eaa e E ts CD d E ap r A oy a O d E Jb 4b A ie Io SE ae eb ll e her caution available cae other formation availableestricted entry prohibited Meer J LA Di ad E554 area F554 area caution area gt H i p P E H 4 E kr 4 q A ke A ATA oo Fe ac Se ee ae F a a EE military practice area ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 administration area cargo transhipment area Figure C 8 Chart 1 screen 8 191 X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES C 8 Aids and services P R S
35. 12 11 2013 185 di L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES um Wheel over Geographical position of the wheel over to reach the new leg A wheel over is computed in relation to the turning radius Wheel over ETA Estimated time of arrival to a wheel over XTE Cross Track Error Alarm that is enabled when the mobile is outside the lane A sound signal is associated to this alarm to inform the user of the danger The sentence that allows to acquire date and time UTC day month year and local time lag 186 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Appendix B ECDIS INFORMATION MANDATORY This appendix lists the various particulars required by the standards to find them easily B 1 Links table Reterences ais Us 61174 4 6 1 6 8 129g G 17 5 6g CCRP CCRP configuration page 96 61174 4 10 6 6 9 7k Piloting fix page 146 Version page ii 61174 4 16 6 10 F 7 1 Information on the application Applied standards page 187 Installation page 2 1174 5 3 2 o Requested screen page 1 6 Get Readability g pag aaa EH 4 3 2 1 7 3 1 7 5 1 Screen size EC E 25 61174 5 8 5 6 7 3 61174 5 8 5 6 7 3 2b Visibility at night Warning message page A7 message page 4 61174 6 9 4b Twelve hour log Configuring the display of the ee of the Glossary page 179 Presentation library page 188 62288 4 10 4 5 1a Terms abbreviations
36. 2013 201 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Informations NME IXMloFormatEx temperature i PTSAN ee ARNOUX SIMRAD SPSIMP Thermometer D 4 5 GEONET TRAWL NET For the implementation select the NMEA PTSAG iXSea source in the properties of the trawl net relevant informations previously added namely e Position corresponding to the central position of the mouth of the trawl net this value is calculated from the ground cable length port and starboard positions decoded frames and its previous value which gives the impression that it takes above and improves its stability Note a shift set to the position reproduces the three values of the net positions center port and starboard e Submersion corresponding to the average of port and starboard submersions e Horizontal spread corresponding to the distance between the projected onto the perpendicular to the direction of the otter boards e Rolling calculated from the port and starboard submersions Input Output amp Mobile Configuration EE SC EN ETA Own Ship Cursor a Source Checking Corrections Filtering Z AGA CPA Own Ship Cursor A E Ant Length Offset iti ER Art Beam Offset SS meme Et des Trawl met i AB Position NMEA PTSAG Neal v Calculation rate us jason AD UTC of position referenc SE EA Fosition port side Stream lt Automatics Se fev ON Position starboard Se Lf Warn l
37. 2013 49 i W i b su L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To edit a place 1 Click Display Centre on Place and select the place you want to edit 2 Click Edit and change your desired settings in the Geographic Place dialog box 3 When finished click OK To remove a place 1 Click Display Centre on Place and select the place you want to remove 2 Click Delete and Yes in the warning message 3 Inthe Centre on Place dialog box click OK 50 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 6 l X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Iil 4 Centring on a mobile Centring on a mobile is to move the main view but also to enable the motion control on this and update the orientation if head up mode is enabling state of the object with a mobile already centered with motion control this command stop the Centring command on a mobile is a flip flop command ie it is reversed depending on the current E motion control 11 4 1 ON OWN SHIP To centre on Own Ship do one of the following e Click the Centre on Own Ship line in the Display menu Display Centre on Own Ship F2 Orientation F Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place Scale k Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom oom 10 Zoom F3 zoom F4 oom 10 Charte k Colour Mode Ecdis Mode Hide All User Obj w True Vectors User Objects Groups V Figure III 5 Display menu e Use the toolbars OWN SHIP Default h
38. 3 1 6 2 page 13 and pages see 3 1 6 3 displayed on the screen To access the dialog box allowing to modify them 1 Right click the information bar or page window Position conning 50 56 908 N 001 41 941 E Water vector re 955 37 True heading 055 3 Depth 9 20 m Figure II 28 Information page contextual menu 2 And click Customize Windows Information Information Bar Label Parent Information Information Pages ER Position conning OWN SHIP Position conning ER Ground vector TOWN SHIP Ground vector ER Water vector TOWN SHIP Water vector E True heading TOWN SHIP True heading ER Depth TOMM SHIP Depth Ss 2 A Ss OK Cancel Figure I1 29 Configuring Information Windows The Information Windows window allows you to change the information you will display in the information bar and the information pages You can add several types of information about the system or a specific mobile The informations are organized by category identified by a symbol EN main information D auxiliary information SS shiphandling information E weather information Es seabed information target buoy information Ef property information F route information AS main information system 4 cursor information system 4 auxiliary cursor information system EE ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 LA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The dialog box of the
39. 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 51 09 007 N 000 3S4 232 E gwasa Valid Administrator Li Information No 2706 2013 08 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship ele DR 51 0S S87 N 001 36 341 E lt WGsed4 gt Valid Administrator Information 26 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship iBlue 51 06 S99 N 001 23 444 E lt Wigse4 gt Valid He Administrator Information No 26 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMloMobile Own Ship iMBlue SO SS 237 N 001 25 8235 E Gd Valid He Administrator Information Mo 25 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship iMBlue 51 05 843 N 001 32 019 E lt WiGse4 gt Valid He Administrator Information No 2506 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ele 51 OO 70 N 001 18225 E lt Wiesed4 gt Valid He Administrator Information No 25 06 2013 08 00 00 40008 IXMloMobile Wavire XBlue 50 56 760 N 001 S8 200 E lt Wesed gt aide C Administrator Information No 24 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMloMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 41 798 N OO0 06 447 E lt Wias d4 gt Valid Administrator Information No 2406 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMloMobile Own Ship iXBlue 51 O6 163 N O01 20 207 E lt Wesed gt Valid He Administrator A warning Yaa 21 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship Blue 50 59 799 N 001 42 043 E lt WiGs84 gt Invalidi H Administrator A warning Yaa 21 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship iBlue S0 59 799 N 001 42 0
40. Angular width of sector to watch for the guard sector or the Safety Distance for the security polygon 6 Eventually check Display zone to watch to see the representation of the safety area on the screen 0O A ON ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 35 xXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual Figure I 14 Danger detection options To activate danger detection 1 Check the Danger Detection option in Navigation menu Navigation w Danger Detection File rt elica Echt Salanta og gran rece aani m Teack Keenia aram frani e eapipg Figure II 15 Danger detection activation 36 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES i Fake Fr Fat ea ALrhkeOLS AN Es Uw Tei EA Ia a o liVitWeVava dh U Qa A A oo Bei NI all w e 11 8 1 BACK UP DATA The configuration s backup functionality allows you to backup into your desired location the hard disk a removable disk etc Gecdis configuration s files and folders This may be useful in the following cases e Fora specific reason Gecdis suddenly stops and configuration data hasn t been saved e A unt into your hard disk has a breakdown In ENC chart mode chart databases are also copied into the backup folder So any operation on the database adding removing and updating a chart leads to a backup Identification Format Display Datum To
41. By displaying the planisphere you get a default global coverage on which can be superimposed specific chart data ENC etc wit Sos las Et been Ee wu mu d e un d a ee SI VI e H bebe Figure V 5 With the planisphere H Figure V 4 Without the planisphere To display the planisphere in background 1 Click the Display menu select Charts Chart Display Mode and then check Planisphere In Background or Planisphere depends on the cartographic module ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 105 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 ENC Charts iXBlue format V 2 1 INTRODUCTION Gecdis is an ECDIS Electronic Chart Display Information System an informational system for maritime navigation that is considered as the equivalent of an updated maritime chart Gecdis aims at e Improving sea security e Facilitating chart updates e Reducing the bridgework This nautical Geographic Information System GIS is an expert system which contains two elements e A database called ENC Electronic Navigational Chart containing any geographical information that is useful to navigate safely e Integrated equipment Before any ENC can be used in an ECDIS it is loaded into the hard disk and converted into the system s own internal formal SENC The ENC module aims at integrating and displaying completely ENC charts such that sailors do not have to
42. Chart type A cell may be compiled to six different scales according to navigation purpose The different chart types are as follows and Settings All Users gt 1 2 500 Harbour gt 1 75 000 Approach gt 1 260 000 Coastal gt 1 700 000 General gt 1 3 000 000 Overview gt 1 15 000 000 Charted Depth Altitude above or below a level of reference of a point in Earth that is constantly or periodically submerged Numeric value that allows to check the validity of a received or transmitted sentence Clearing Line Half line made from seamarks that allow to avoid dangers ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 179 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES COG Course make good of the ship Compilation Scale The scale to which the data were initially compiled For example this may define the scale of the paper chart used for the digitization of the data This scale is determined by the hydrographic agency and coded in the navigation chart Conning position The reference position of the ship If the positioning system is not located on the bridge the value of this position is the result of the correction that is specified by the user Control State of dependence of an object related to another object Coordinates Geographical co ordinates of a spot that is numerically represented on two axes Corrupted Data Data altered or modified since production issuance or retrieval COW Leeway track of the ship that
43. DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VI NAVIGATION VI 1 Bearing Lines and Bearing Range Lines You can make the bearing of an object a seamark or more generally a position That way a rudimentary trisection can be drawn This is the same as an EBL To make your position with bearing lines 1 Click Navigation and then Bearing Line 2 Click one seamark and drag the mouse until the angle displayed corresponds to the bearing of the seamark 3 Follow the same steps for a minimum of two seamarks Your position is in the point of intersection of all the bearing lines Bearing range lines allow you to display the heading and distance between two spots seamarks or locations in the main view In most cases you will use them to estimate the heading and distance between your ship and a particular spot in the main view To use bearing range lines 1 Click Navigation and then Bearing Range Bearing Lines 2 Click the first spot of the main view of which you want to know the distance and heading in this example this is the Own Ship 3 Drag the mouse and click the second spot A circle is shaped and the bearing and distance are specified in a yellow box To delete all bearings and EBL 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Delete All Bearing Lines 140 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Ke You can consult the distance and bearing between the cursor and the Own Shi
44. F2 Centre on Place Scale Window Zoom oom 10 Zoom FS Zoom F4 Zoom 10 Charts Colour Mode Ecdis Mode Hide All User Obj vw True Vectors User Objects Groups V Figure 12 An example menu the Display menu The Windows type menu bar lists all software menus A menu is a list of commands that have in common the action they allow to do It consists of e Submenus allowing to access another menu example Orientation Those kinds of submenus are followed with an arrow e Commands allowing to open dialog boxes example Centre on Place Those commands are followed with suspension points e Commands running directly an action example Ecdis Mode selecting a command highlights it in blue When it is not possible to use a command this one is greyed example Best Scale The menu bar includes the following menus System mainly manages the configuration print user change and exit application Display allow you to use some ECDIS main functions zoom colour modes etc Mobile manages the main controls for fleet of mobile Navigation manages navigation elements and autopilot User Object creates and manages the user objects View enables the display of the different windows on the screen and allows to configure display contexts e displays information about the software Some other menus may be added depending on the current Gecdis version These menus are as follows e Radar all
45. F4 Zoom 10 Figure III 1 Defalut scales menu To change the scale you can WW 46 Use the Scale menu from Display menu directly to select the scale Use the Display menu with scale command Best scale selecting the most appropriate scale for the current chart 1 100 1 250 1 500 1 750 1 1000 1 1500 zem 1 5000 1 7500 1 10000 115 000 1 25 000 1 50 000 1 75 000 1 100 000 1 150 000 1 250 000 1 500 000 1750 000 1 1 000 000 1 1 500 000 1 2 500 000 1 5 000 000 117500000 1 10 000 000 1 25 000 000 1 50 000 000 1 75 000 000 1 100 000 000 Gecdis v8 User s Manual IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONFIGURE THE EXACT DIMENSIONS OF YOUR SCREEN SEE II 1 1 PAGE 25 IF YOU DO NOT CONFIGURE THEM THE MAIN VIEW AND ALL OF ITS ELEMENTS MAY BE DISPROPORTIONATE AND THE SCALE WILL NOT BE ACCURATE Window Zoom focuses the view on a rectangle around the cursor equals to holding a left click holding the Shift key When the rectangle is visible you can change its size with the and keys Zoom x10 multiplies the display by ten Zoom skips to the following scale is roughly equivalent to double the scale Zoom skips to the precedent scale is roughly equivalent to divide by 2 scale Zoom 10 divides the display by ten Use the toolbars Use the shortcuts for that see 1 2 1 page 6 The scale is accurate at the center of the screen it is adapted to the average latitude and is less accurate to the
46. Gecdis This piece of information can be obtained o by Windows selecting a software source In this case ensure that Windows time zone has been correctly set o With a NMEA sentence of your GPS selecting one of your desired NMEA sentences in the scrolling list To configure system s information 1 Click Mobile and then Configuration 2 The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens To configure your time zone 1 Double click the clock in the far right lower part of your screen min Us ke DE Eyl Ja JE 11 40 Figure IV 20 Windows time in task bar Date et heure Fuseau horaire Temps Internet Ajuster l horloge pour l observation automatique de l heure d t ppliguer Figure IV 21 Changing Time Zones 2 On the Date Time Properties dialog box click the Time Zone tab and select your desired time zone in the scrolling list of this tab 3 Click OK 82 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 ar L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Input Output amp Mobile Configu olf Ant Beam Offset oes ER cursor position Eee i Distance Own Ship Cursor Cursor position za i Bearing Own Ship Cursor od ER TTS Own Ship Cursor External oa ER ETA Own Ship Cursor ER CPA Own Ship Cursor EN Final ETA feel EN Final destination Acquisition Time uk 0 0 EN XTE a Add Delete Close Figure IV 22 Available Information about the Cursor
47. Gecdis v8 User s Manual GETTING STARTED a For simplicity in this manual the term Gecdis is used as a generic name to identify the name of the software which has several product name SeaXpert Gecdis C SeaPix 4 VAsalanma Gecdis is a navigational aid system with a geographic information system working on standard computers fitted with Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows Seven Navigational aid is given by displaying electronic charts on which information from the ship equipment and sensors connected to Gecdis are shown such as GPS gyrocompass or depth sounder navigation tools Gecdis fits IMO regulations for cartographical data storage SP52 and their displaying SP57 Gecdis is fitted with in line and independent tools allowing system customisation according to three levels the ship s equipment the user and his practices hierarchy and access rights Furthermore Gecdis provides independent back up arrangements to ensure safe navigation in case of a failure So if your machine suddenly malfunctions the parameters the equipment does not need to be reinitialised manually and operator settings do not change 1 1 1 REQUESTED CONFIGURATION 1 1 1 1 Computer Hard disk 1GB 10GB advisable 1 1 1 2 Screen Gecdis has been designed to be used with one or several screens a minimum of two is recommended Here are the necessary criteria of the screen to be consistent with the ECDIS standard e The operat
48. HOs using the digital signature files decrypt the cell permit supplied with the data and then decrypt the data set so that data validation can be performed sign the data and then append its own signature It must also be able to create decrypt user permits and produce cell permits A line which crosses successive Meridians at a constant angle This route is represented by a straight line in the chart with the Mercator projection Relative Motion abbreviation RMC The sentence that defines the recommended GNSS minimum data time latitude longitude ground speed heading to steer and date This sentence is transmitted at most every two seconds The rotation of a ship about its fore and aft axis ROT The sentence that defines the rate of turn Route 1 The itinerary followed by a ship and relates two remote points possibly separated with intermediary waypoints Route 2 The heading of the leg of a route Route Monitoring The process that allows to follow a route Safety Contour The contour related to the own ship selected by the mariner to be used by ECDIS to distinguish the display between the safe and the unsafe water and for generating anti grounding alarms The depth contour associated with the vessel enabling a distinction to be made between the two colour display mode and the four colour mode and also allowing anti grounding warnings to be generated Safety Depth The isobath above which the ship cannot navigat
49. ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual e To define a perimeter around the ship enter a value for the Angular width of sector to watch angular width Figure V 45 Angular width of sector to watch 4 Click OK See II 7 page 35 for more information To activate the danger detection option 1 Click the Navigation menu and check Danger detection item 2 Select again Danger Detection to deactivate the option V 2 14 CONSULTING INFORMATION ON AN OBJECT There are two types of ENC related objects e Updated objects which are objects created by the mariner and included on a ENC cell as an update and e Chart objects which are objects already included in the ENC cell Clicking these two types of objects you can display their associated information When you select an objet the scrolling list of the Consultation window allows to display all punctual objects that are located near the location in which you have clicked If no point object is located at this location the list shows all lines in this area If no line is located near this position the list shows all the areas near the position This allows to limit the number of objects in the list So if you wish to consult a line or a depth area click in the chart in a location that is at least 1 cm far from any point object buoy wreck etc To display information on an object 1 Select the object Ctrl key clicking the object 2 Informatio
50. SENSES Appendix D EQUIPMENT CAN BE INTERFACED WITH GECDIS In general all equipment conforming to the NMEA standard is compatible with GECDIS This appendix indicates all NMEA sentences managed by the software the specific AIS compatibility as well as various cases of NMEA extension and specific messages from different devices ry d g six E AIR A eg g i 7 7 f fet eat NINAEA GC ImTANHPraAaece II ry J A i Tam BY Sil FA 4 g 8 amp Ps yh eg F Sew Gee mS P Bi TAYE AY Lat UF INTE Lef fe a i l a S ey x tion NMEA Descrip Module Input Output ABK AlS addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement x ABN AIS addressed binary and safety related message J BBN AIS broadoast binary message DBT Depth below transducer DBK Dem below keel o Bs Dem below surface Dem rm Detten Hoc Heading deviation and variation Hom Heading magnete T Heading true o SSA 1 Global positioning system GPS ds Sit Geographic position Latitude longitude pons NSSfixdata o d SSA GNSSDOP and active satelites st _ GNSS pseudorange noise statistics sda Meteorological composite mm Humidity o o B Barometer o o 77 Air temperature mma Water engems MD Wind direction and speed mv Wind speed and anoe OSD Ownshipdata o o Recommended minimum navigation information IXMRoutes Recommended minimum specific GNSS data Kc 194 ISD M 038 B EN
51. Source Checking Corrections Filtering fee ER UTE of position reference E 50g SH i Cog Depth Pod So age d S ES Filtering by threshold vw 100 0 m ER True heading Filtering by percentage vw 10 ER Depth Double wal tw s ER Charted depth ouble value rejec 1 Final ETA Filtering i only used with a real acquisition source Hi Final destination asd Add Delete Close Apply Figure IV 42 Filtering a Piece of Information To apply filtering to the depth parameter 1 Inthe Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Depth and then the Filtering tab 2 You can apply two types of filtering e By threshold If the difference absolute value between two acquired values goes beyond the threshold indicated the last value will not be taken into account e By percentage If the difference between two acquired values goes beyond the percentage indicated the last value will not be taken into account Check the Double value reject box when you do not want to take into account an acquired value if twice bigger than the last acquired value This may occur if the echo of a sounder is also acquired This is only available for the depth piece of information Wei For threshold and percentage filtering if two consecutive values go beyond one of the defined filters they will be rejected but the third will automatically be accepted even if it also goes v beyond one of the filters that have been defined IV GG INHERITING INF
52. UP HEAD UP NORTH UP CENTRE ON 3 SH menu TRACK ON CREATE 4 Settings BATHY DATA BATHY DISPLAY MARK DISPLAY OWNSHIP TRACK 10 MOBILE DELETE ALL LINES ERBL OWNSHIP ERBL FIX OWNSHIP 10 SUMMARY APPEARANCE RADAR PRIORITY AIS RADAR FUSION RESET COUNTERS DEAD RECKONING AUTOPILOT STOP KEEPING START KEEPING IMPORT CREATE CUR CREATE HIDE ALL DISPLAY ALL FILTER SELECT DATABASE CAMPAIGN FOLDER UST PILOT CHANNEL INFOS PAGE INFOS BAR BLACK BOX CHART OVER aa 42 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 xXSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual l1 9 2 2 3 How to stop using the TurboWin mode Here s how to deactivate the TurboWin mode 1 Inthe first menu select and validate SETTINGS command zoome gt z00m lt lt zoome gt lt amnoow gt ower navi Figure II 25 First menu _ 2 Inthe settings menu select and validate GENERAL command mer DISPLAY y osema owes oo Figure Il 26 Settings menu 3 Select the User Interface tab 4 Uncheck TurboWin mode check box Figure I 27 TurboWin deactivate 5 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 43 x z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 11 10 The Information Windows Gecdis gives you the possibility to configure the information bars see 1
53. a view and then you close it the next time you will display it again it will be located on the new location 1 3 4 ACCESSING COMMANDS Gecdis is a Windows based software and like any Windows based software it allows you to access commands in different ways In the menu bar With Shortcuts With the toolbars With contextual menus With context sensitive buttons that appear on the right of the screen when you select an object In the dialog boxes and windows 16 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Ds L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES LA Important Features to Know 1 4 1 THE OWN SHIP Own ship in Gecdis associated with one or more mobile The Own Ship with initial uppercase is the main vessel and is the basis for many treatments informations relative to alarms route monitoring man over board Several secondary vessels can be added their goal is to represent other sources of information to compare to that of the main vessel Own Ship For example the Own Ship can be acquired from a GPS and a secondary vessel can be estimated In this example if at a given time the GPS fails the user is ability to reverse the ship and have therefore estimated Own Ship To differentiate vessels in views the Own Ship is drawn in black white the secondary vessels in gray When launching Gecdis for the first time the Own Ship is created with a set of informations position SOG COG SOW
54. and ARCS charts So when a user adds a point object on an ENC chart for example this modification is almost immediately taken into account by other machines that are connected to the network The machines copy the modified cell into their own hard disk ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 3 A 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To use data synchronization you just have to select the DATA folder in every machine to specify to your Gecdis version the location of the other DATA folders that must be compared with Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms Security Miscellaneous User Interface Back up data in Synchronize data on Staton Disk Program Files tBlue S ea pert D ata vw Stations Disk l Program Files tBlue Sea pert D ata Black box with periodic system report 1 mir OK Cancel Figure II 17 Synchronizing data To configure a data synchronization folder 1 Click the System menu Settings General Configuration and then the Miscellaneous tab 2 For every machine check the Back up data in check box and select its Data folder 3 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply 38 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 6 l X 3L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual IO User interface The User Interface page allows the user to configure software interface Identification l Format Display l Datum Toolbar Users Alarms Security Miscellaneo
55. annotation ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 117 XSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Figure V 24 Chart object with annotations V 2 11 2 3 Delete all annotations To delete all annotations 1 Select the object in the chart Cell fB200000 Position 48 59 503 N O05 23 985 W Buoy shape pillar Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Fog signal Category of fog signal whistle Light Light characteristic long flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 10 Radar transponder beacon Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Gecdis v8 User s Manual Signal group E Fadar wave length OU w Annotation SaaS First annonation Comment My first annotation Author Administrator Created O9 07 2013 15 38 30 Annotation SE00N0 annonation Comment My second annotation Author Administrator Created 09 07 2013 15 38 46 Move object Annotate object Mark as deleted Remove Annotations 2 Inthe Consultation window click the Remove Annotations button A message displays notifying that all annotations are deleted The orange mark used to annotate an object on the chart is removed but the annotations are still displayed in the Consultation window Figure V 25 Chart object with deleted annotations 118 Cell GB200000 Position 48 59 S03 N O05 23 985 W Buoy shape pillar Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Fog signal Category of fog signal whi
56. box and click Apply e f you want to spy outgoing data check the On Output box and click Apply 4 A file is generated in the following access path Gecdis Settings Mobiles lo You can open it to check data This file is generated as the sentences come or go To be refreshed it needs to be closed and re opened IV 6 2 5 Transmitting Sentences via a Stream Gecdis allows you to transform your PC into a sentence simulator transmitting NMEA sentences Input Output amp Mobile Configuration aT EE ah System a Output Parameters Sentences ta transmit d COMI GPS g NET UDP 7 dee NMEA output on NETI oa Eh Input datum P NMEA output Transmit enable vw with checksum Po E File Emission Rate Us Talker identifier E EI H TCR1 S5Serveur Position format S A a E Precision 5 seee e Datum WGS84 ae b ER Input datum hd 4 F Add Delete Close Apply Figure IV 33 Parameters of Sentence Transmission Here is the description of the NMEA sentences transmission parameters e Transmit enable This check box allows you to permit the transmission process e With checksum This check box allows you to check that the transmitted sentences are correct The checksum calculates the value of the sentence and indicates it at the end of the sentence with the following syntax x where x defines a number The device that will receive this sentence will also calculate the value of the sentence If both values correspond the
57. button Chart Permits Installed permits Licence type Navigator Service 100 User permit C 23CD4D01F024644 1000 1001 Licensee Marie Claude Flechais 1002 1003 Vessel name SHORE 1004 its i 1005 Host system name 1006 1011 Fixed site 1012 1013 30 Avenue de LU Amir i014 1015 1016 1018 min 5 Do one of the following 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 31 12 2009 21a oan PN m Close Figure V 48 Chart Permit Installation Dialog Box After Being Installed e If you have received the permits on a floppy disk insert it in your floppy disk drive select 3 2 Floppy A and click OK e f you have received the permits by e mail select the location of the hard drive into which you have copied those permits and then click OK 6 The fields in the Chart Permits dialog box are not empty anymore On the right the licensed charts are listed Now you can click the Close button 132 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 el X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Chart Disks Install CD ARCS charts to import Di ES Install Installed diskis Uninstall Figure V 49 Installing Charts 7 If you haven t already installed any chart CD ROM on your hard driv
58. by operation Operations tab DKZKATGS2 00704057 A6E0D84CB156C4 47 46E0084CB1I6C4404 36DE7 Oe Ep DK 3 BORNH2 007040583 367654 3DF 3966483367654 30F39E64957CBFOUB21D0E99 0 Exchange Set Import Catalogue To import non encrypted ENC cells IF YOU IMPORT NON OFFICIAL DATA A MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED IN THE HIGHER RIGHT SIDE OF THE SCREEN ALSO IF YOU LOAD THE CORRUPTED DATA CELLS ARE REJECTED Importing a catalog of non encrypted ENC cells Import Cells To select 1 file 1 cell or one directory of several cells See V 2 3 3 Enables to download a permit file that is a txt file required by the software to install all purchased charts It contains as many lines as the number of purchased charts Si permit txt Bloc notes Chart Name f Ioj x Fichier Edition Foret 8 EE 2i Code required to encrypt the chart pee ae 0110 13 08 kk ttt Uen E BESVLBNK 200704 05 9BLES3DS FSEFOD229BLES3DS7FSGFDD2ZEOLBSDS023E281F9 O DE22100020070405763 9ACE4 68205671763 9ACE46820567164641653 9658SBE68 DE316003 200704 05C4 OO67CDF9SB2B1LCC4 OO67CDFSSB2B1LCO4 BF FCECDOAG39F9 O DE316004 200704 058 5S88F1 5469498808 5S88F1 54 Bo 49Bs04606D6RR03156CB85 0 DESL6650200704059BC4 2142 FODS084E9BC4 2142 FODSO8AEEADCSEBADLDSBBLE DKLNORSOZ 00704 05B56F 6597 SE7O0BA4B56F 6591 DE ZOOBAAEADEAEZ 757 36BA12 0 DK2BORNH2 00704 CSBLBAG3 D2 595 402 3FRB1646302 595 402 3FSE4 AD2C980CO5ESB O DK2NORSO2 00704058246921 460509922824 6921 46050992 20EFR2F 94
59. column newest to oldest e Receipt Date the date when the event has been acknowledged e Id the identifier of the event i e the code identifying it and differentiating it from the other events for a specific module Source e Source the module of the event e Title the title of the event e Text the description of the event e User the user that was logged on when the event occurred You can use any column to sort the list in one way or another Below the window a pane shows the message and a second pane explains this message when required 8 Each event has its own life The lifetime default is 7 days Some have very short as one hour error input output for example or very long as 3 months position report to multiple 4 o clock Bottom right of the window six commands are available d o Allows to move up and down in the list of events Li di e 1 a Allows to move in the events that specify that Gecdis has been launched u Allows to pause the list Any new events will not be displayed which can be useful when Li analyzing when events are added e Allows to print the black box with the events and the order of presentation on the screen To open the black box 1 Inthe View menu select Black Box 56 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 111 5 2 2 Configuring the display of the events The black box has three levels of even
60. configuration consists of two parts e Windows zone corresponding to the information bar or page to configure e Information zone corresponding to the list of information from the bar or page Each zone has it s own toolbar to e Add a bar page or information after the selected item if no item is selected the item is added to the beginning e Delete the selected item e Edit the properties of the selected item the title for a bar or page the label for information a Editing properties of a geographic position information is used to select the display format geographic format with specific datum or UTM format for example e Move the selected item TERMS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO THE LANGUAGE OF THE FIRST EXECUTION OF THE SOFTWARE THIS IS BECAUSE THE OPERATOR CAN CHANGE THE TERMS AS HE WANTS WHICH MEANS THAT THE SOFTWARE DOES NOT TRANSLATE TITLES AND DEFAULT LABELS CAN NOT BE TRANSLATED INTO THE APPROPRIATE LANGUAGE THE DEFAULT gr To add a piece of information 1 Select in the left window the name of the bar or page to which you want to add a piece of information 2 Select the item in the right part where your new information will be inserted 3 Click the ss button or click right on the list and select Add information command Parent TOWN SHIP k E Position i charted depth E UTC of position reference Le Final ETA Esos P Final destination Ecos P vm sow Le Heading to steer ER cow P woo 4 F OK Ca
61. configuration is made with checkboxes By default some alarms are unchecked Alarm groups are gathered depending on the modules they belong to System Routes ENC Charts etc So this is easier to select them Security Miscellaneous User Interface Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms Check alarms to display in the alarm bar Default A ARCS Charts ER Chart datum ig undefined or does not match with system datum EN s ER Dangers detected on the route wie ENC database synchronization errors Routes mle ATE came back under leg limit mle Heading gap came back under the limit irs hs s E rie ES a i koai OK Cancel Apply Figure II 8 Configuring Alarms To configure alarm display Click the System menu click Settings and then General Configuration In the Configuration dialog box click the Alarms tab Check the alarms you want to display in the alarm bar To go back to the default configuration click Default button Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply oF Go M A 32 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES PH Gecdis can be used by many different kind of users each one having specific needs By default four groups of users are defined Administrators Captains Navigators and Guests On one hand the Administrators group can use all Gecdis functionalities without any limitation On the
62. creation date When you open a new session the last settings are automatically applied 102 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 el l Xa UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V CHARTS Gecdis can read several kinds of charts e Raster charts e Vectorial charts A raster chart is a scanned image of a paper chart whereas a vector chart is produced by capturing the details and information on the paper chart digitally The main advantage of the first one is the fact they all have already been produced as paper chart so it is easier to get them The second ones are more complex to produce but they offer more extensive possibilities such as clicking on an object to have information on it Before installing any kind of charts you must have licences or permits To do so you must follow procedures that will make you contact IXBLUE s sales department Only the chart module that has been selected by the user can be operated at a time This guarantees projections and datums homogeneity especially concerning ARCS HOWEVER FOR A SAFE NAVIGATION IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED TO USE ENC CHARTS THAT ARE 1 CERTIFIED BY THE AUTHORITIES THESE CHARTS OFFER A SET OF AUTOMATIC INTERACTIVE FUNCTIONS e FOR SAFETY ALERTS SUCH AS SAFETY SOUNDING LINE DETECTION OF DANGER ON SHIP S ROUTE ETC ENC CHARTS ARE UPDATED REGULARLY V 1 Chart Catalogue V 1 1 DISPLAYING THE CHART COVERAGE Displaying the coverage area allows the user to vi
63. each time mark that is associated to the ship s track Longitude Angular distance measured in degrees from a point of the Earth to the original meridian Main view A part of Gecdis screen that displays ENC data Gecdis screen is composed with several parts that you can display or not Object that is inserted by the user and allows to indicate the location of a point in the chart Maximum XTE Maximum allowed difference to a route This difference is materialized by a line on each side of the route When the Own Ship exceeds the maximum XTE and the route is enabled an alarm is generated The Marine Mobile Service identification Navigation status Situation of the ship that is defined with outdoor conditions NET UDP network stream see UDP National Maritime Electronics Association Official association that has defined a standard organizing interfaces on electrical signals and data transmission protocols with the serial port of RS232 type devices Type of orientation that allows to orient the chart view to the geographical north 182 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Indication that indicates the distance between the more northern and southern points of an area OSD Own Ship Data The sentence that gives Own Ship data heading route speed current drift Overscale The display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the
64. following e Use the list of user objects and select the object you want to delete e Use the Delete button of the context sensitive buttons on the right of the screen To display the properties of a user object 1 Select a user object and click the Properties button You will then have the possibility to change the information relative to the selected user object VII 2 2 LIST OF USER OBJECTS The list of user objects allows you to manage the objects of Gecdis object database It looks like Windows Explorer and allows you to display the hierarchical structure of folders and user objects List of User Objects Marks 37 Display Hide XX Delete Move Objects Export Positi Comment Folder H poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 632 N 007 20 135 E E poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 38 316 N 007 22 059 E poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 792 N 007 21 067 E poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 38 306 N 007 21 245 E poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 867 N 007 21 793 E re An MMMA NNI a an 400 H ADIT A AATEC E 4 mt j Figure VII 1 List of user objects To open the list of user objects 1 Click the User Objects menu and then Open Objects List This menu enables to e Display Centres the main view on the selected object and allows you to make visible a hidden user object When a user object is visible it is displayed in black e Hide Allows you to hide the selected user object in t
65. has been modified e Information has been taken into account All alarms are gathered into three main categories depending on their effect on the use of the software 2 General information e g when Gecdis starts amp Warnings e g when no Own Ship is defined e Errors This kind of message is displayed when a malfunction has occurred e g if an error has occurred on a communication port These alarms can be displayed e Inthe Alarm window e Inthe black box 11 5 1 THE ALARM WINDOW The alarm window is resizable and it is located by default above the screen You can see this window as the first alarm is displayed the last received alarm is constantly displayed This alarm blinks as long as the user has not clicked above 15 07 01 Input Output TCPI error ee ZC List of alarms 15 06 44 Route Monitoring The heading gap with the e 15 06 42 Al Track Keeping Autopilot in manual mode en Button that allows Check All Alarms to check all alarms 15 06 44 Route Monitoring The heading gap with th Jk ACK M1 Q D1 O Alarm counts The last warning Button that allows to check one alarm Figure III 15 The Alarm Window a See II 5 page 32 for further information on how to configure the alarms to be displayed in this window To check the last alarm 1 Click ACK button in the status bar or press F11 shortcut see 1 2 1 page 6 2 Do the same thing as many times as there are alarms Warn
66. if a ship is motionless on the ground apparent wind is the same as true wind While navigating apparent wind is not so useful except concerning aircrafts the true wind is more important and is annotated in log books It can be computed in relation to wind as well as ship s COG and SOG Relative wind has the same speed as the ship but its direction is the opposite of the ship e True wind Apparent wind Ship s speed Wind configuration is performed in the Input Output amp Mobiles Configuration dialog box You can add True wind speed True wind bearing Apparent wind speed Apparent wind bearing Each of them can be dead reckoned computed by the software or acquired However to compute true wind the software requires that information on apparent wind be dead reckoned or acquired The same process occurs to compute apparent wind The following shows how to compute true wind and apparent wind e Example 1 If the vessel is heading west at 7 knots and the wind is from the east at 10 knots the relative wind is 3 knots at 180 degrees In this same example the theoretical wind is 10 knots at 180 degrees if the boat suddenly stops the wind will be at the full 10 Knots come from the stern of the vessel 180 degrees from the bow e Example 2 If the vessel is heading west at 5 knots and the wind is from the southeast at 7 07 knots the relative wind is 5 knots at 270 degrees In this same example the theoretical wind is 7 07 knots at
67. is enabled you can display a chart with an even better resolution Likewise if 2 iS 136 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES enabled you can display a chart with an inferior resolution e To display automatically the chart with the best resolution When charts with several resolutions are available for the centre of the screen the chart with the higher resolution is automatically loaded To select this option click the Charts menu and then click Automatic Loading In addition as ARCS chart are raster typed charts some options of the software such as projection and scales in the Display menu are not available and then disabled l YOU CANNOT DISPLAY SEVERAL CHARTS SIMULTANEOUSLY AND ZOOM IN OR OUT A CHART ZOOM e ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE THE CURRENT CHART V 33 CONSULTING INFORMATION ABOUT CHARTS V 3 3 1 Chart General Information When consulting a chart you can consult information about it which is split into two parts e General information Chart Number Country of Origin Edition Date etc e Information about display Projection scale Ellipsoid Name etc Chart Information Chart Number 2656 Chart Title English Channel Central Part F Country of Origin United Kingdorn Disk Number Panel Number Panel Title English Channel Central Part Edition Nurnber Seer Edition Date SSS File Issue Date eee es Raster Chart Issue Date Sn
68. is the result of true heading and leeway angle CPA Maximum closing point i e point of closest distance between two mobiles Database Entity in which user objects are stored in a structured way Coverage A geographical area that describes the coverage and extent of special objects A set of parameters defining a coordinate system and a set of control points whose geometric relationships are known either through measurement or calculation Deep Contour lsobath that marks the boundaries of a water plane in which depth is deeper A part of the seabed in which depth is deep compared with the surrounding points With Gecdis deep contour is represented in grey and waters whose depth is superior to it are in white Equals to deep waters An isobath connecting points of equal water depth which is sometimes significantly displaced outside of soundings symbols and other chart detail for clarity as well as generalization Depth contours therefore often represent an approximate location of the line of equal depth as related to the surveyed line delineated on the source Deep Soundings Soundings whose values are superior to the safety depth Deeper water contour The area of the sea bottom that is deeper than the surrounding parts The deeper water contour area is shown in grey and deeper water in white The latter are particularly deep waters Vertical distance between the surface of the sea and the seabed counted with positive figu
69. it the current drift So e Leeway track true heading leeway e Course make good Leeway track current drift Leeway track e Ze Headline See eee eS OL eee Sulit drift NN Swaying vector a E oe E ae Figure IV 2 ECS vectors representation Figure IV 3 ECDIS vectors representation Gecdis allows you to configure information about leeway track course make good and drifts Leeway track represents COW and SOW It needs true heading to be added Current set and speed generate current drift If both of them are not available current drift will not be displayed and will be considered as nil Course make good s vector is generated by SOG and COG Swaying vector is generated by swaying course and speed informations This vector is the lateral projection of the course make good Finally vectors won be represented in the same way whether in ECDIS or ECS mode as described in the figure above ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 63 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 1 2 APPARENT WIND AND TRUE WIND True wind defines the wind that would be felt if the ship would be motionless on the ground Apparent wind is the wind that a person feels on a moving ship i e the wind that is acquired by an anemometer and a weather vane lt is the result of two motions the real motion of the air true wind and the ship relative wind e Apparent wind True wind Relative wind So
70. k Filok view Figure Ill 20 The View Menu Here are the main commands Close allows to close the window that has focus except for the main view Please note that this command can not be the desired result when the software is configured to automatically activate the window under the mouse cursor see II 9 2 1 page 40 Chart in Full Screen allows to maximize or restore the size of the main view toggle command Display Contexts allows to display a configuration of Gecdis display that has been previously set see IIl 7 page 61 Toolbar 1 allows to display close the horizontal toolbar toggle command See 1 3 1 5 page 12 Toolbar 2 allows to display close the vertical toolbar toggle command Black Box allows to display close the dialog box toggle command to check the event history See III 5 2 page 55 Chart Overview allows to display close the chart overview toggle command This view is the perfect complement to the main view to geographically locate The context menu for this view can make it on the main view or ship and set its scale respectively relative or absolute System Display Mobile Navigation User Objects Bathy Charts Radar view ixBlue l System Pilot l Position passerelle 51 03 863 N 001 19 371 E Vecteur fond 18 0 kn 192 9 Vecteur surface 18 0 kn 192 9 Cap vrai 192 9 Profondeur 22 0 m Wa Display Hide Appearance Configuration Track Start Stop Colour
71. list will consist of the cells or charts crossed out by this route 104 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Xa LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES HH The Navigational Type and Usage criteria can be set at the same time contrary to Geographical Area and Route grteerenseeeeerenensensness Chart Type 557 v Navigationnal Type Approach l M Geographic criteria Geographic 4rea From NEI 00 00 00000N 000 00 00000E To SW 00 00 00000N 000 00 00000E E e Route Scenario 1 D OK Cancel Figure V 3 Filtering Charts To configure the chart filters 1 Inthe Charts Catalogue window click Filter button 2 Inthe Filter Charts dialog box check Use a filter 3 To configure a chart and navigational type select the appropriate values in the corresponding scrolling lists 4 Ifyou wish to select a geographical area or a route check Geographic criteria 5 Do one of the following e To choose a geographic area either click Geographic Area and then enter the coordinates in From NE and To SW or select an area clicking S and dragging the mouse on the planisphere e To choose a route click Route and then select the desired route in the scrolling list 6 Optionally uncheck the Use a filter box to remove the configuration of filters V 1 4 DISPLAYING THE PLANISPHERE IN BACKGROUND You can choose to display the planisphere in background or not
72. mobile IN GA ASSIGNING INFORMATION TO A MOBILE When opening Gecdis for the first time a mobile is created with the same pieces of information as default acquired mobiles see IV 6 3 The pieces of information are as follows e Position UTC of position reference SOG COG SOW COW True heading Charted depth Depth On the other hand when you create manually a mobile several default pieces of information are displayed that depend on the type of mobile you have added You can add information to a mobile depending on which type of information you can acquire with your sensors Position bow Position stern Input Out Leeway angle Drift speed Drift course Auxiliary Shiphandling Weather Seabed TargetiBuoy Main TargetBuoy Property Tr F F FF FF FF FTF F ALL AIS STATICS INFORMATIONS Mobile k Fleet Figure IV 37 List of pieces of information that can be added to a ship To add a piece of information 1 Doone of the following e Click Add and then Information e Right click the name of the mobile to which you want to add this piece of information and then click Add and Information in the pop up menu 2 The list of all the pieces of information that have already been added to the mobile are displayed Note that the pieces of information already added to the mobile are greyed IV 6 5 CONFIGURING INFORMATION After adding pieces of information you must configure them Depending
73. on those that are selected you can configure or not some fields 94 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Yy LA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 5 1 Source tab The Source tab allows you to configure the selected piece of information ER My GPS a Source Checking Corrections Filtering i Position T Position GC Sf Automatic se Calculation rate 0 03 Stream sAutomatic we Dpechc header S ER charted depth vw Checksum Acquisition TimeOut AU Us 2 Blue g Add Delete Close Figure IV 38 Configuring the Source of a Piece of Information Fodutomaticy Allows you to choose the source of your information You can estimate or acquire the major part of the information When you select lt Automatic gt Gecdis chooses in acquisition mode incoming sentences that are most appropriate and take them into account in priority The list of sentences is shown in Erreur Source du renvoi introuvable Stream Allows to choose the stream that will be assigned to the selected piece of information only if the source is not lt None gt Estimate Software or Simulate If you select lt Automatic gt the most appropriate stream is selected and taken into account in priority by Gecdis Calculation rate Mainly concerns the position of mobiles When you enter 0 0s in this field the position is not updated in dead reckoning mode This field must be used if you want to maintain your data fast
74. one to the other the sentence will be accepted Otherwise it will be rejected ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 91 gt 3 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Rate Defines the transmission rate The default value of this field is 1 0s which means that sentences are transmitted each second Talker identifier Allows to indicate a specific talker to begin the transmitted sentences e Precision Defines the precision of the minutes in the position format You can choose to give a minute precision up to five digits In reality this precision equals to 1 8 cm e Datum Defines the datum for the position of the sentences ei Si System A Output Parameters Sentences to transmit N COM GPS D NET UDP l K z E NMEA output on NETI Detailed description ee E Input datum 5 NMEA output w ZDA w AMC Oso VDA wv TTM Gei 3 File Emission vw OPT GLL ROT WH TLL g TEPI 555erveur v GGA HDT VEW v Viiz a a FILE Mhe ER Input datum bad 4 k Add Delete Close Apply Figure IV 34 Selecting the Sentences to Transmit To transmit sentences 1 Click Mobile and then Configuration 2 On the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box double click the stream that will transmit sentences and click NMEA output On the Output Parameters tab define the parameters that are best suited to your needs Click the Sentences to transmit tab Check all the boxes that represent the sentences you want to transmi
75. other hand the other groups are associated to specific access rights you can configure with a checkboxes system The three groups have different access rights to commands So when you will assign a command to the Supervisor group only this group will be able to use it However if you assign one of them to the Navigator group the Supervisor group will also be able to use it and assigning one of them to the Guest group will allow the Captain and Navigator groups to use it as well 11 6 1 ADDING A USER Security Miscellaneous User Interface Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms User amp Administrator Captain Name Jh Navigator Password RRR Guest Ah New User Confirm password 9000 Vrun Group Administrators MM Configure Fights New User Delete User OK Cancel Apply Figure II 9 Adding a user To add a user to the list of users Click System Settings General Configuration and then the Users tab Click the New User button The Name field is filled out with the new user label Enter the name of the new user in this field In Group select to which group you want the new user to belong Enter a password in the Password field and confirm this password in the Confirm password field Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply The user has been added You can now open a new session with this new user You can also delete a user by selecting it and clicking t
76. pane of the Chart Disks dialog box select a CD gr IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO DELETE A CD WHOSE CHARTS HAVE BEEN LOADED 2 Click Uninstall CD The charts of the uninstalled CD are then removed from the ARCS folder in your hard drive l ARCS MODULE CANNOT WORK WITHOUT ANY CHART THAT S WHY IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DELETE A CD o IF THERE IS ONLY ONE CD IN THE CHART DATABASE V 3 2 3 Updating Charts ARCS charts follow updating of notices to mariners Each week a new CD is produced with all new updates made on the charts since ARCS chart CDs have been edited for the last time The updates are cumulative i e the updates made by ARCS the last week are added in the same CD to the updates that have already been added the weeks before Installing an update CD is the same deal as installing a chart CD The update CD code is WK When you install a new edition of an update CD that you have already copied you needn t to uninstall it before installing the new edition Each update CD is kept in the UPDATE folder of the ARCS structure So if import is correct the previous edition is deleted and replaced by the new one Otherwise it is unchanged So you will never lose data ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 135 Q x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES x Install CD ARCS charts to import D i Sex Install a N Installed disk s WKO 07 Update CD United Kingdom 15 02 2007 Uninstall Update CD
77. safety namely through an alarm and an event in the black box It is not possible to disable the alarms against an optional filter on the alarm text messages has been introduced to limit their number de ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 vat L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Upon receiving a text message an event will always be added to the black box by cons if filtering is active the alarm will not be generated if at least one of following condition is satisfied e The recipient of the addressed message does not match the MMSI of the ship The content of the last message received is identical to the previous message received The received message does not contain space usually coded message To enable filtering of AIS messages 1 Check the Enable AIS Messages Filter box ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 73 LA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES lV 5Representation You can create different types of mobiles or fleets You can also configure them We remind you that a fleet is a group of mobile elements buoys targets etc and a mobile can either represent your ship or a mobile in a fleet IV 5 1 DEFINING A MOBILE APPEARANCE First you have to configure the general appearance of mobiles The appearance you will define for mobiles will be later considered as the default one for any mobile you will insert except if this mobile is included in a fleet
78. scrolling to the south when the cursor is near the edge of the view ER Geographic scrolling to the south east when the cursor is near the edge of the view ES Geographic scrolling to the south west when the cursor is near the edge of the view ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 15 A L_ LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual SIGHT SHARPER SENSES ECS ECDIS mode mode rae Geographic scrolling to the west when the cursor is near the edge of the view Ol Ol Window zoom in by pressing Shift key aa Zoom out by pressing Ctrl Shift keys 1 3 3 USING VIEWS Gecdis screen includes three default locations for views and windows above on the right and below When you display a view or a window for the first time it is located by default on one of these three locations You can then move and resize it in order to match with your needs displaying specific views on specific locations You can locate two views side by side or one above the other In the latter case the first view is displayed above the second one This window management is handled by the display contexts in View menu see IIl 7 page 61 and all positions of the windows are saved To move a view 1 Click the blue title bar of the view you want to move and drag it holding down the left button of the mouse 2 Ifyou drag the view outside the location in which it should be docked the view is displayed without icons in floating mode a If you move the location of
79. symbols Mobile representation page 76 Vector representation page 63 Route representation page 162 B 2 Applied Standards ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 187 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual Appendix C THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY CHART 1 C 1 INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY A B PA 4 DI O NON ENC Data on Display EN DATA Information about the chart display A B This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Pa JL H Over scale part of a Display Figure C 1 Chart 1 screen 1 INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY 4 6 Test symbol For size checking Manual update Q LS deleted e ei No symbol exists in the symbol library 2 Default symbol for WEWOBI This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Test symbol for color checking Figure C 2 Chart 1 screen 2 188 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 xs L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES C 2 Natural and man made features C D E This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 NATURAL AND MAN MADE FEATURES C D E aa eee GE clr 20 0 coastline surveyed land elevation pipeline overhead ee a oom e e e rs E 909 es coastline unsurveyed vegetation table overhead river stream road Fixed bridge o D name O H re N Dp ei Ho Figure C 3 Chart 1 screen 3 C
80. that your system is configured with the correct datum to avoid errors while positioning See II 3 page 29 to select the current datum 1 5 2 2 Sensors Check the configuration of your sensors Each sensor must be connected to a communication port of your machine You add these communication ports to Gecdis and configure them to acquire specific sentences see IV 6 2 page 86 to configure a stream See IV 6 5 page 94 to configure an information 1 5 2 3 Implementing alarms Many alarms are managed in Gecdis Here are some links to set some alarms See II 5 page 32 to configure alarms display See III 5 page 55 to consult alarms See II 9 page 39 to configure the danger detection see IV 3 page 67 to manage specific alarms to Own Ship See VII 5 page 171 to assign to an area an alarm when a ship entres or leaves 1 5 2 4 Route management Routes are a very important step to navigation You will certainly need to create routes before any departure with a new itinerary See VII 3 1 page 158 to create a route See VII 3 6 page 163 to skip to route monitoring See VII 1 page 153 to learn more about user database 1 5 2 5 Charts Check that you have imported all the charts you need for your voyage in the chart databases See V 2 3 page 109 to manage the ENC chart database See V 2 12 4 page 125 to set values for different water contours and depths that will ensure safe navigation 20 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 l xs L
81. the bold italic underlined characteristics or changing its colour Change the alignment of the font e Insert bullets lt gt IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOUR SEE LA 2 PAGE 17 4 Enter a date in the Date field and If you want change the position in the Position field 5 Click OK When you have created a text you can edit it shift it hide it or delete it selecting it and clicking the corresponding right context sensitive buttons eee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee EE Im mm mm mm mm mm mm wc wm wm mm e mm mm mm mm e mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm E mm mm mm mm em Te ee em em e e mm mm me Figure VII 29 Text in cartographic view 178 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Appendix A GLOSSARY An area within which the best estimate of the overall accuracy of the data is uniform The overall accuracy takes into account for example the source accuracy chart scale digitising accuracy etc Accuracy of Data An area with a uniform estimated degree of general data accuracy General accuracy takes into account source accuracy chart scale and digitization accuracy for example Acquisition Timeout Delay since last acquisition after which the piece of information is considered as Invalid Mechanism that announces with a sound and visually a condition that requires attention Altitude The vertical distance ab
82. the consulation window This case is particularly interesting to follow the mobile aw Information 1 1 AIS JO KASHI x Position SL O 341 N 001933 108 E Dist Bearing from Own Ship 2 690 NM 310 89 CPA 2 67 HM TCPA 1min 00s Ground vector 17 1 kn f 227 09 Navigation status Under way using engine True heading 230 0 ROT 0 00 fmin Collision risk Mull A Additional Information A Parameters A Track Appearance Send en Cone Yo Position Hide Delete Appearance Configuration Bear ing R ange Line Start Track Figure ILR Centre command in mobile consultation window 11 4 3 MOTION CONTROL Motion Control manages how the main view to follow a mobile Own Ship or any mobile When centering on a mobile is activated the motion control of the main view has too You should know that the motion control is configurable see II 1 3 page 26 about that 1 4 3 1 Relative and True Motion The motion control keeps the mobile in the main view Two modes are possible e Relative motion In this mode the mobile is at a fixed position in the view and all other objects are moving when the mobile moves You can adjust the mobile position in the view with the keyboard arrows Warning You didn t choose to detect all the dangers SHEET EE eM A be eee eee 001 43 00E DUT 001 44 00E 001 42 S0E peg Figure Ill 9 Relative motion e True motion In this mode mobile movements are visible in the view as the fixed
83. the object is from the official chart or has been manually created Cell fB200000 Position 48 59 503 N O05 23 985 W Buoy shape pillar Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Fog signal Category of fog signal whistle Light Light characteristic long flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 10 Radar transponder beacon Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Signal group By Radar wave length 0 03 Move object Annotate object Mark as deleted Depth area x Cell B200000 Depth range value 1 100 Depth range value 2 200 Depth area x Cell GB200000 Depth range value 1 s0 Depth range value 2 100 Local Chart Information x Compilation scale GOOD Yertical datum Mean high water springs w Figure V 23 The consultation window V 2 11 2 1 Access the dialog allowing to edit To access the dialog box allowing the cells to be edited 1 Click the Charts menu and then point to Manual Updates 2 Select New Ponctual Object or New Area depending on the type of object you wish to create V 2 11 2 2 Annotate a chart object To annotate a chart object An object can have several annotations All these annotations are listed in the Consultation window 1 Select the object in the chart 2 In the consultation window click Annotate object Enter information and click OK An object can have several annotations Clicking Annotate object adds an
84. time and is indeed the contents of the database Checked the numbers still appear in the list The comment field is used to build the alarm text To enable AIS detection alarm 1 Check the Enable box in the AIS Detection area the list becomes active 2 Check the mobiles in the list you want to detect IV 4 2 2 2 Import TvswMMSI The Import TVSwWMMSL ini button to import all mobile in database from those reported in the ini file and activate their alarms Historically this file is used to manage by TurboWin AIS detection before implementation of the database Besides being able to operate the old file in Gecdis its import into Gecdis has three advantages e Define the comment field e Add mobiles never acquired e And activate massively detection on a set of mobiles During import mobile not involved are not so far off and mobile already involved in the database have their field activated alarm and commentary updated The list of mobile to be detected must be defined by a section named WarningList Then each handset is registered by the couple MMSI Comment using the key for the MMSI and value for comment WarningList MMSI Number Warning Comment 232316000 FPV NORNA 232435000 FPV SULISKER 232514000 FPV VIGILANT Figure IV 12 TvSswMMSI ini exemple IV 4 2 3 AIS message filtering Receiving a message not related to security AIS protocol messages 6 addressed and 8 broadcasted is treated as other messages relating to
85. up of 16 alohanumerical character and a PIN code made up of 4 numbers To subscribe annually to ARCS charts you must tell your vendor which charts you want to order and give him your user permit Then you will receive two files either on a floppy disk or by e mail The first one gives information about the user and the second one deals with the charts that have been licensed to the user Those files will allow you to register your licences Note that you will also receive the chart CD ROMs To register ARCS licences 1 Send your ARCS vendor your user permit and the charts you wish to order 2 Your vendor will send you two files either by diskette or by e mail allowing you to install permits Now you can launch the ARCS module see V 3 1 3 page 131 3 If you buy other ARCS chart permits you will have to repeat the step 1 For any further details on your ARCS vendor please contact IXBLUE s sales department V 3 1 3 Launching ARCS Module Before launching the ARCS module for the first time check that you have the ARCS licence floppy disk and ARCS chart CD ROMs The first launching of the ARCS module allows you to indicate the location in the hard drive in which charts must be loaded and to install ARCS permits This will be made either when launching Gecdis if the ARCS module is configured as the default chart module or when launching the ARCS module in the software Later you will have to enter your PIN code when launching once a
86. vertical edges especially at very small scales ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 m o UL fe mmm Gecdis v8 User s Manual S Be emm WeeUTO VU WoC ad DEEP If IGH P DEF ENSES A IL 23 Colo ur m node Color graphics and text on the screen is dependent on the ambient light so as not to blind the operator or be unreadable USE OF THE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL MAY INHIBIT VISIBILITY OF INFORMATION AT NIGHT MOREOVER IT MODIFIES THE CURSOR AND THE COLOURS OF THE SYSTEM EVEN WITH OTHER APPLICATIONS THAN GECDIS Gecdis uses three color modes to be ECDIS compliant These modes have been specifically designed to be used at some point in the day ECH E e Dusk e Night ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES By default the background Day mode is white and Dusk mode is black See II 1 2 page 25 to change this behaviour To change the colour mode you can e Use the Colour Mode menu from Display menu and select the mode Display Centre on Own Ship Fz Orientation F Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place Scale Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom zoom 10 zoom Fa zoom F4 zoom 10 Charte k Colour Mode J e Day Dusk Ecdis Mode Nicht Hide All User Obj E w True Vectors Next Mode Fa Previous Mode ShiFt F9 l Next lt gt Previous User Objects Groups V Figure Ill 2 The colour modes menu e Use the shortc
87. will be able to read the sentences from the systems whose output port will be set to 1001 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 87 gt 3 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Es S System a UDP Stream Input Parameters Spying yf COMI GPS gj F NET UDF mi NETI Comment UDP EN 5 Input datum a ath a T TCP1 55Serveur Port 1001 IP 08 UTC Output fae lf ARPA Range Port IP SE ARPA Marker ss Input filter fess ON Ant Band type a Port IP ER Ant Status E Add Delete Close Figure IV 25 Configuring an UDP Stream for Reception E Si System a UDP Stream Input Parameters Spying yf COMI GPS Input Output amp Mobile Configuration D NET UDP ml gt gt e merer g NET Comment UDP z a MMEA output Port 1001 IF Output ee File Emission Pot w 1002 IP ae TCP 555erveur h Input filter Si UTC Fort IF z ER ARPA Range bd 4 d Add Delete Close Figure IV 26 Configuring an UDP Stream for Transmission To add and configure a net stream J 2 3 10 88 Click Mobile and Configuration In the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Add Stream and NET NET1 is added to the left pane list of streams on the left of the dialog box If this is the first UDP stream you have added the value of the first Port field defaults to 1001 If your machine has several network boards and you wish to receive sentences that come from one of them check the IP box below C
88. you to manage the waypoints Adds a new waypoint after the selected waypoint Deletes the selected waypoint Shows the properties of the selected waypoint and allows to configure some of them Moves the selected waypoint up in the list of waypoints Moves the selected waypoint down in the list of waypoints Inverts the route so that the first waypoint of a route becomes the last one the second one the last but one and so on Prints on the default printer the route properties in the form of a table D eo xX To add a waypoint to a route with the Waypoint Properties dialog box 1 Select a route and access the Route Properties dialog box clicking the Properties context sensitive button 2 In the table of the Route Properties dialog box click the waypoint before which you want to add a waypoint and then the g button 3 In the Waypoint Properties dialog box enter a name a position a turn radius a max XTE and if you want a comment 4 Click the Rhumb line or Great circle radio button if you want the leg that ends with this waypoint to be computed with rhumb line or great circle 5 Ifyou want select a display context in the Display Context scrolling list 6 Click OK 160 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To add a waypoint to a route with pop up menus 1 Select a route and then right click the waypoint before which or after which you want to add an
89. 0 is used as marker reference and is located in order to get the most perfect symmetry of the ship s outline and make the shipbuilding easier It is not necessary to take the Sensor one point GPS antenna as the marker origin Make sure that the lines are well closed to get a nice shape the first and the last couple of points are identical Be careful when defining XY values since too small values can stop the ship s outline display since the display depends on the scale e REM comments or notes indicating the source file This line is then ignored by the compiler You can add comments notes or empty lines to space out the document anywhere in the file e Unit reference unit for the values Three possibilities meter fathom and foot Repect the syntax e Sensor one position of the master sensor s GPS antenna on the outline This position is expressed according to the marker s couple of points 0 0 It is shown by a flashing sensor e Stern rear track position on the outline of the stern Position shown by a flashing sensor With this position the ship s bow is automatically determined but not viewed e Depth sensor position position on the outline of the sounding sensor e Point for event mark position on the outline of the event that will be considered when creating an event e HULL defines the different vectors of the ship s hull The limit is set to 100 points Be sure the shape is closed by repeating the first po
90. 0 E 11 11 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4319146 Coastal NE 18 35 930 5 148 22 620 E SW 19 00 000 5 148 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 v Figure V 2 The charts catalogue Wei As for BSB charts they are listed in a module independent of the other chart catalogue module In this module each chart is presented with the following identification parameters name scale datum name edition date picture To display the list of charts 1 Inthe System menu select Settings menu Charts and check Charts Catalogue To centre the main view on a chart 1 Inthe list of charts click the cell you wish to centre on 2 Click Centre on V 1 3 FILTERING CHARTS Sorting out the list of available charts allows you to organize charts with a particular criterion But filtering the list allows you to display in the planisphere and the cell table some cells that correspond to one or several specific parameter s They are as follows e The type of charts ARCS ENC you can select all kinds of charts or one in particular e The type of usage Harbour Coastal Approach Berthing General you can select all kinds of usage or one in particular e The geographic area you can enter the points located in North East and South West or drag with the cursor the desired area with ZZ If one of the selected points is inside a cell this cell will not be part of the selection e The route If you choose a route in the Route scrolling list the filtered
91. 013 Wd S R 2 lU UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII S Marks and Events VII 5 1 CREATING MARKS In this part you will see how to create a mark and an event The difference between both of them is that a mark can be inserted anywhere in the main view whereas an event can only be inserted in the current ship s position events are mainly used when an immediate decision should be taken General Alarms Position c0t38 23037N OO0 S4 21869E Ios Date 11 07 2013 09 53 24 Mame Charted depth 0 0000 mi Immersion 0 0000 rm Appearance Symbol ob R Colour E 4 Comment OK Cancel Figure VII 20 Mark properties dialog To create a mark 1 Click User Objects and then Create Mark 2 Click in the main view where you want to create your mark 3 A dialog box allowing to configure the mark is displayed You can define the different parameters of the mark Position Date Name Charted depth Immersion Appearance defined by a symbol and color To improve the repetitive tasks the last four colors and symbols used are selectable directly gr IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOUR SEE I 4 2 PAGE 17 e Comment The contents of the Comment field will be displayed nearby the symbol of the mark 4 Once configured the mark click OK ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 171 x z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES
92. 10 BH465014 4 0 Approach 1 45000 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 Reset Database BH515014 4 0 Harbour 1 12 000 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 E5200303 2 30 General 1 700 000 07 07 2010 24 06 2008 5201080 1 17 General 1 700 000 22 04 2010 12 08 2005 5201082 1 15 General 1 700 000 25 06 2010 09 07 2008 5201083 1 3 General 1 700 000 26 05 2010 28 07 2008 E5300105 4 2 Coastal 1 90 000 12 07 2010 28 05 2010 E5300394 1 1 Coastal 1 90 000 12 01 2010 22 09 2009 E5300404 1 13 Coastal 1 90 000 14 06 2010 04 04 2008 E530040B 1 5 Coastal 1 90 000 20 05 2010 26 11 2008 F5300414 ara Coastal 1 90 000 14 06 2010 19 05 2004 E530041B 2 13 Coastal 1 90000 18 06 2010 21 05 2004 E5300446 5 7 Coastal 1 90 000 02 06 2010 27 10 2008 E5300454 4 7 Coastal 1 90 000 29 07 2010 16 12 2008 E530045B 3 9 Coastal 1 90 000 09 08 2010 22 11 2006 E5300464 4 0 Coastal 1 90 000 04 05 2010 04 05 2010 ES5300474 3 6 Coastal 1 90 000 25 06 2010 01 02 2010 sl Figure V 22 Accepting or denying updates To display the detail of an update click the Last Import tab For further details on the import report refer to the paragraph Getting an import report page 111 To update a cell 1 Access the Charts Database dialog box 2 The semi automatic updating module can be used to update e Import Commercial Exchange Set see V 2 3 1 e Import Catalogue see V 2 3 2 e Import Cells see V 2 3 3 So click one of the button and browse to the update files 4 When import is ove
93. 12715000 PANTORRATORAS 219100000 PETER FABER 219354000 e vw Enable 415 Messages Filter OK Cancel Apply Figure IV 11 Target AIS alarms page IV 4 2 1 High speed This alarm is intended to alert the user to a mobile above a set value speed A hysteresis of 1 is applied to stabilize the state to a value close to a threshold ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 71 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To enable high speed alarm 1 Check the Enable box in the High Speed area 2 Set value in the corresponding edit IV 4 2 2 AIS detection This alarm is intended to alert the user that AIS mobile identified by MMSI was detected during the acquisition IV 4 2 2 1 Operation The principle is simple just check the numbers in the list to detect moving up the base and ensure that the Enable box of AIS Detection area is checked Selecting mobile monitoring is stored in database and is persistent To manage the AIS alarm detection needs a Gecdis internal database In fact this database is Wei used to provide AIS static information in the first reception of the dynamic information of the mobile and in this way a mobile is now filled with many details name size etc Conversely when static informations are received Gecdis updates the database entry corresponding to the mobile being acquired Although brief the list of mobile shown in the configuration of the AIS detection is updated in real
94. 2 Click Configure Rights The User Rights window is displayed This window allows you to select the access rights for the Captain Navigator and Guest types of users 3 Do one of the following e To make an action available for the Captain types of users check the box that crosses the action and the Captains column e To make an action available for the Captain and Navigator type of users check the box that crosses the action and the Navigator column Both types of users are selected e To make an action available for all tyoes of users check the box that crosses the action and the Guests column All users are selected You can delete an access right granted to a user by clicking on the corresponding checkmark 11 6 3 OPENING A NEW SESSION While using Gecdis it is possible to open a new session with a new user This way a new user can log on without needing to close and re open Gecdis When a user logs on his own configuration is reloaded with his specific rights see II 6 2 To open a new session 1 Click System and Log Off x where x is the type of user that is currently connected or right click on the chart and select the Log Off command Se Display Mobile Nay Chart Information Print Bathy Surface Settings Bathy Isolines Log OFF Administrator SE Exit or Create Mark Figure II 11 Open a new session A message asks you to confirm that you wish to change session Click Yes In the User field se
95. 3 113 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XBLUE Charts Database Charts History Permits 5a Certificate Z209FB93970228FE09F0274643833 User permit Gecdis v8 User s Manual Import Permits AR201130 0 31 05 2011 AR301150 0 31 05 2011 AR302120 0 31 05 2011 AR401590 o 31 05 2011 _ Delete Al Permits AR402490 0 31 05 2011 AR402550 0 31 05 2011 AR402560 0 31 05 2011 AR420010 0 31 05 2011 AR420020 0 31 05 2011 AR420030 0 31 05 2011 AR420040 0 31 05 2011 AR420050 0 31 05 2011 AR4EMO42 O 31 05 2011 AR4PP112 0 31 05 2011 gt Figure V 18 Delete one or several permits V 2 9 LOADING CERTIFICATES The certificates crt files are required to authenticate the origin of each encrypted ENC cell The IHO certificate is automatically loaded when installing Gecdis The Load certificate option can be used to Replace the IHO certificate when the one installed with Gecdis is expired in 2013 Load a certificate from another provider of encrypted ENC PRIMAR for example If you load a certificate delivered by an organism other than IHO the loaded certificate is used temporarily Le only for a session If you quit and launch again Gecdis the application uses the official IHO certificate again To load a certificate 1 Inthe Charts Database dialog box select the SA Certificate tab 2 Click Load Certificate 3 Select the certificate available in the Gecdis SdnEnc directory and click Load xj Load Ce
96. 3 Port features F This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 PORT FEATURES EI and 5 52 Edition 3 4 shorline construction lock gate gt Fc breakwater tidal basin Figure C 4 Chart 1 screen 4 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 189 amp A L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual C 4 Depths currents etc H I This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 DEPTHS CURRENTS ETC KH I and 5 52 Edition 3 4 E L b swept to 4 5 q dredged area swept area unsurveyed incompletely surveyed C N See a yee eech Kl J Ba quality of data zone Se quality of data zone B quality of data zone Di TF Af S b d rn tidal stream data area of depth less than safety contour low drying line Dr ER accuracy shallow contour e pn 2h low safety contour Kn Kn kr accuracy De gt deep contour Aar LU z or d colours For symbolizing of depth areas Figure C 5 Chart 1 screen 5 C 5 Seabed obstructions pipelines etc J K L This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 SEABED OBSTRUCTIONS PIPELINES ETC J K L E fishing tat pipeline oi e obstruction line Se AE e ee see x i x R GC ry JS ay gt gt an Te wu amp B OD D Foul area area of wrecks or obstructions seabed area EE GX wv vj w ot ok b gt a ae d O a D LR ee aaa e L ES E TA S ing Facility sand waves restric rea 7 ww P jul g CHE E Loann A A cable area pipe area oil pi ae area
97. 4 Inte TEE 30 11 4 1 insent a new DURON EE 30 11 4 2 CONTO epee E E A E E E en ee eee eee 31 II 5 ALARM S r a E E 32 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 V DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES yi Gecdis v8 User s Manual 1 6 LTE 33 1 6 1 PRICING WSC EE 33 1 6 2 Configuring Users Hobes 33 1 6 3 Opening a New Session soeecssicet dc ceenise stesenen cence puirssumetnbccutencestiocentaccewattwaiiete pehdduvetve deeepseddnetont 34 1 7 DANGER DETECTION eters cee ce sc netct eectes Ba E aaria 35 1 8 IVIISCE LIANE OUS reece ce sete ctce E E E 37 IEN Ba KUD 6 2 t eee eee E eee nen eee ene eee eee ee eee 37 1 8 2 Sy IC MPOMIZIAG 1D AU RE 37 1 9 SERIES Eege 39 IO Reie lee Eege 39 1 9 2 General parameters ceccccceeecccceeseceeceeeceecaeeeeceeeeceeseuseeeseeuecesseaeceeseaeeeessueeesseneeetsneeeeeeas 40 1 10 THE INFORMATION WINDOWG cccccceceeeessccecceseseesseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeoeooeeassssssseeeeeeeeesessaeoogooganseees 44 AN RGEC DIS DOPA Vren E E E EE E E 46 1 1 EE 46 EZ COLOUR ee 47 IES CENTRING EE Eege 49 11 4 SEMESTER 51 IL A OR RE De WE 51 Mka Ra ODIE urera en ean ee ee ee 51 IL A3 Moton Gontrol pe 52 MS ALARN oe ee ee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee eee ee 55 II The Alarm le ele EE 55 Hee Egeter 55 HES THE VIEW IN ai eco eee esterase eege Eege 59 AE DISPLAY CONTEXT WEE 61 IV MOBILES AND GU EEN Ss ccstteciesetesercacees cures E AE EE EE E E E N 63 IV 1 NAVIGATION corso ieai E E EE EOS ERE N 63 IV 1 1 Mobiles Ve
98. 4 9O5CAES DK2SKARK 2007040562284 014 93 SBDB64 6228401493 9BDBS4 E9902 5548245420 0 DKA GSMONZ OOF 04 CSDSF3FCO6AD BOO 2 2DBFSFCO6ADIBOS32076FC3 FEF 7C99073 0 DK4 KATGN2 00704 059166664 04 6013 019166664 04 860130133CBB1C75CAF9374 DK KATOS 0070405 59CF 584480 PCP 6045 SCP 84480 PCP ROAICUUCZRRLFDSSYBL 0 DEA SUNDT ZOU S04 05 F O04 ODC DEA SOE SF O4 SDRBACHF4 SOESOBSSSF P41 F9FC4 oe 0 DKJKOEBH2 00704 O5CDOD2BEDS3 9794 9CD0D2BEDIS 29 94 SSF 9s eC oC44 Be DEA 0 2 FRSOLOLOZ00 O04 058F298FB961L5R LAF SSF 2SRFBSOLOBLAP SEZ AAQS OGCCOB4299 0 35 0 FRACLOs 0200 04 O54 4 6 9SeChSDPLSF S414 98sec es DP Ler oredseCo9bsBbol499 0 1 0 GB2Z0s 000200704 0597 ES KSEAFPFRDS692ESLSSEAF FBDS6S66E2019eD1 20984 0 21 0 GB2035 200200704 05 BBSCACSFFLYSs4F56BSCAC SFFLYOs4F 5s46s6Fs0Cucasi7e O 12 0 e 4 F ot Figure V 9 Permit txt Import Permits To manage the acquisition of permits See V 2 8 Delete Permits Delete All Permits SA Presents the SA Scheme Authority Certificate that authenticate the origin of ENC charts Certificate oad Certificate To load a certificate See V 2 9 108 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 l x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual V 2 3 MANAGING THE CHART DATABASE V 2 3 1 Importing a set of encrypted ENC cells Encrypted cells are provided with a set of files in an exchange set containing E 01x01 G Fichier Edition Affichage Favoris Outils Pr c dente gt ft
99. 43 E lt WiGse4 gt Invalid H Administrator A warning Yaa 21 06 2013 08 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship Blue 50 59 799 N 001 4 2 043 E lt WiGs84 gt Invalid H Administrator AS warning Yo 2006 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ele ene T ota d MG gt Undefined Administrator A warning Yaa 20062013 12 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship iMBlue ocx 7 ee en d MG gt Undefined Administrator i Information Mo 19 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship Blue 51 05 569 N 001135922 E lt Wiesed gt Valid He Administrator E Information Mo 19 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship iBlue 51 OS 080 N 001 19 087 E lt WGese4 gt Valid He Administrator 3 l z Display Blue 51 O6 S99 N 001 23 444 E lt Wa564 gt Valid Heading 275 9 High quality SO W 18 0 kn Valid lt p Base Standard pi A Filter il d 58 Figure Ill 19 Filtered Black Box ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 IXx3 LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 6 The View menu Gecdis screen consists of many different windows the information bar the information pages etc Most gathered in the View menu and it allows you to choose to display or not each one of them Close Ctrl F4 Chart in FullScreen Fiz Display Contexts Toolbar 1 Toolbar 2 Black Box vw Chart Overview Chart 2 Channel view Sonar view Critical Information Custom Information
100. 91 6min 51 06 825N 001 19 279E 160 0 0 0 51 06 825 N 001 Jf 4151244014000 3min 50 43 440N 001 34 361E 0 0kn 358 0 016 0 0 0 50 43 440 N 001 ei 4151259553000 imin 51 01 893N 002 09 613E 0 0kn 216 0 249 0 0 0 51 01 893 N 002 J AIS AIS station 23 6 05 51 07 966 N 001 20 556 E 51 07 966 N 001 lt 7 AIS AIS station 23 11 05 51 07 329 N 001 20 603 E 51 07 329 N 001 7 4 b Figure IV 7 List of Mobiles Centre on Centres and controls a mobile on the main view The Centre on button is then pressed Display Displays the selected mobile if hidden When a mobile is displayed its specific pieces of information are displayed in black Hide Hides the selected mobile in the main view When a mobile is hidden its specific pieces of information are displayed in grey Dead Reckoning Opens the Dead Reckoning dialog box see IV 7 page 101 Appearance Opens the mobile or fleet appearance dialog box see IV 5 1 page 74 If you click this command after selecting Ships in the left hand pane the mobile general appearance dialog box is displayed If you select a mobile the specific appearance dialog box of this mobile is displayed Configuration Opens the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box See IV 2 page 65 Own Ship Gives the Own Ship status to the selected mobile see IV 2 page 65 The button is pressed if the Own Ship is selected Select with cursor Allows to select s
101. 91 NM Closed shape Colour Line Pattern Properties Delete Objects Filter Insert Point Move Point Delete Point Figure I1 20 Tooltip with commands Display commands in tooltips parameters e Never commands are never displayed in the tooltip e When mouse is inside commands are displayed in the tooltip when mouse is inside the tooltip e Always commands are always displayed in the tooltip 11 9 2 GENERAL PARAMETERS 1 9 2 1 Active window Gecdis v8 User s Manual In the Windows environment there is always only one active window at any given time This is the window that receives events such as pressing a key or moving the mouse In Gecdis as there may be several windows displayed at the same time it is advisable to set the automatic activation of the window under the mouse cursor by checking the box Activate window under cursor Otherwise the last active window will remain as the operator will designate a not clicking ES SeaXpert Station SeaXpert Folder iXBlue System Display Mobile Navigation User Objects Bathy Charts Radar View THE CONCEPT OF ACTIVE WINDOW IS IMPORTANT FOR MANAGING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS PARTICULARLY WITH DEAD RECKONING CONTROLS ON A MOBILE ARE INTERCEPTED ONLY BY THE MAIN VIEW 3 ae H ecDis D mos own sue MAP Ol E D DI ee ee 77 ae ee ee System l Pilot Position passerelle Vecteur fond 5
102. ACLOS 0200 04 O54 4 ESSSC eS DPLSF O44 6 9eseCeSOPLSFoPeOkeCD9BSBO1499 0 1 0 GB2ZO0s 000200 04 0592E 91 SsE4F PF RDSOS2ZESLSsEAF PPBDSOSOOE2Z01L9S01L 20984 0 21 0 ios E EEE AE EEA EEEE EE EEEE d K oe Figure V 16 Permit txt Any action importing deleting on the permits is done in the Permits tab of the Charts Database dialog box Charts Database Charts History Permits sA Certificate User permit 209FB93970228FE09F0274643833 OG Ss A Server Expiration Date Comment_ Us 4R201130 CH Import Permits Delete Permi Delete All Permits R420020 R420030 TOG O COG e Me ees oo AR4PP112 To inform when a permit is or is going to be expired or if a permit is invalid Expiration date of the permit i e date until which the chart is available ID of the data server PM Primar UK UKHO The permits can be delivered by several different data server List of charts purchased with the imported permit Figure V 17 Permit tab To import a permit 1 Click Import Permits 2 Inthe media containing the permit select the permit txt 3 Click Import Once imported the permits are stored in the Settings directory of the application in the SdnENC pmt file To delete one or several permits 1 Select one or several lines pressing Ctrl key and click Delete Permits 2 You can also delete all permits at once by clicking Delete All Permits ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 201
103. C of position referenc IP Addresses 10 0 216 Add Delete Close Figure IV 30 Finding the IP Address of a Machine To find the IP address of a machine 1 Click Mobile and Configuration 2 Inthe Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click the System object in the tree to the left 3 Click the Network tab 4 The addresses of your machine are shown in the field IP Addresses IV 6 2 3 Adding and Configuring a FILE stream Gecdis allows you to receive data with a file When you add a file as a stream you ask Gecdis to analyse the sentences contained in this file The system reads them and use them directly gr AFTER PROCESSING THE FILE INSERTED IN THE RECEPTION FOLDER IS DESTROYED 2 Si System a File Stream Input Parameters Spying gd COM GPS o S NETI UDP Car St TCP1 SSServeur FILE1 Comment D ll o a Ee Input datum Falder C Program Fdezht Blues S eaxpertdata Aecenving lo e Oh uc ER ARPA Range 5 Filter 1 ER ARPA Marker IS ER Ant Band type File type 4 a Add Delete Close Figure IV 31 Configuring File Stream To add and configure a FILE stream 1 Click Mobile and then Configuration 2 On the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Add Stream and then FILE FILE1 is then added to the list of streams in the left hand list of this dialog box 3 On the Folder field of the File Stream tab the access path that will receive and read the positioning files is indicate
104. Creating a Punctual Object 2 Select the type of chart object you wish to create 3 Enter the position of the object It is also possible to enter a name and an annotation for the new object as well as a period of validity It is not compulsory to fill those fields 4 Click OK The desired objet is displayed on the chart It is highlighted with the orange mark that specifies the objects that have been created manually V 2 11 2 8 Creating Areas To create an area 1 Inthe Charts menu point to Manual Updates and then select New Area 2 Locate the points of the are on the chart by clicking After inserting the last point right click To create an area you should insert at least three points which opens the Area Creation dialog box x General List of points General List of points Cell BESANT WN 31 18 537 N 004 18 517 E i Delete Object sl 51 18 537 N 004 18 517 E Insert 51 18 186 N 004 18 390 E Gina eege 51 18 176 N 004 18 844 E Dates From 02 09 2010 DN Se Jozmrzoug D Annotation EEN Figure V 30 Creating an Area 1 3 Select the type of chart object you wish to create 4 You can enter a name and an annotation as well as a period of validity for the new object It is not compulsory to fill those fields 5 If you wish to change the position of the points that have been inserted with the mouse click List of Points The locations of the mouse clicks are
105. EEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES reckoned Software Depth Cursor Software Charted depth cursor Software Gecdis v8 User s Manual The depth on cursor s position To display this piece of information isolines bathymetry or 3D must be displayed The charted depth on cursor s position This piece of information is automatically added whenever the Depth Cursor piece of information is added If no height of tide is specified both of them have the same value IV 6 1 2 Mobiles Information The following pieces of information are used to configure mobiles Position dead reckoned acquired Reference position software UTC of position reference software Position bow software Position stern software Position conning software SOG software acquired COG software acquired SOW dead reckoned acquired COW software True heading dead reckoned software acquired Leeway angle dead reckoned acquired Drift speed dead reckoned software acquired Drift course dead reckoned software acquired 84 The geographical position of the mobile that corresponds to the position s sensor e g GPS antenna or a periodic maintenance Example 12 52 294 N 115 21 150 W The last observed position starting setting estimated position etc This position cannot be maintained it is added to the mobile s list of pieces of information whenever P
106. Five formats are available e Geographic Degree representation of the position in degrees example 43 610N 007 265E e Geo Degree Minute DM representation of the position in degrees minute example 43 36 585 N 004 15 902E e Geo Degree Minute Second DMS representation of the position in degrees minute second example 43 36 35 109S 007 15 54 122E e UTM Standard m representation of the position in UTM example 29L 388780 8374767 e UTM Signed northing m representation of the position in UTM signed northing example 29L 388780 1625233 You can select a default zone for formatting positions in UTM coordinate In this case Gecdis will format any angle to a zone rappport in the specified area On the outside this range the coordinates are expressed with the the area assigned to the position IF YOU SELECT lt AUTOMATIC gt IN DISTANCE DISTANCES WILL BE MEASURED IN METERS UNTIL REACHING o 1 NAUTICAL MILE 28 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 xX L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 11 3 The Datum The datum is a science that offers amongst other things constants that define the relationship between a coordinate system and the real Earth the geoid There are many different geodetic datum systems depending on the country or region in the Earth That s why you may receive data symbols routes etc with another geodetic system than your
107. Fix position IV 8 1 FIXING POSITION The black box generates a message that gives the current position of your Own Ship every minute However you can display the position of any ship at a specific time This position will be displayed as a target with the DR label and the UTC that corresponds to the fixed position is displayed This object is only displayed for the current session So if you close Gecdis all positions fixed will be removed from display for the next time you will launch it To fix a position of the Own Ship 1 Doone of the following e Click the Navigation menu and then Fix Own Ship Position e Select your Own Ship and click Fix Position in the pop up menu To fix a position of a ship 1 Select the ship and click Fix Position in the pop up menu IV 8 2 DISPLAY OF FIX POSITIONS Fix positions can be displayed from the Navigation menu To display the fix positions 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Display Fix Position IV 8 3 FIX POSITION SETTINGS You can define the duration of the fix position display To define the duration of the fix position display 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Fix Position Settings 2 Setup the display duration with the cursor from 0 to 24 hours x Fix Position Settings Maximum Time for Fix Position Display Oh Only the last position is displayed Figure IV 46 Fix position settings If you choose 0 only the last fix position will be displayed however its
108. GHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 5 2 Planned route The heading route is displayed with a thick dotted red line Each waypoint is represented with a circle whose centre is the waypoint The lane is displayed with a thin broad spaced out red dotted line If you have planned your route the planned speed for each leg is displayed in a little square o i 8 SS a 232 vi Denn i NK i e EE af a Eeer Fisk Fi Z em E A aud Ta EE PT Ch Z Hee tee a aaa ebe E _ guwssesense SEO eet 02 EE EEGEN Figure VII 1 1 Planned route VII 3 5 3 Alternative route that is highlighted The alternative route is displayed with a thin and tight orange dotted line Each waypoint is represented with a circle around the waypoint Around each waypoint there is a square At the end and beginning of each leg a line crossing and closing the lane is displayed The lane is displayed with a plain and thick red line The heading route of a leg is displayed in the middle of this leg If you have planned your route the planned speed for each leg is displayed in a little square Figure VII 12 Highlighted alternative route VII 3 5 4 Planned route that is highlighted The planned route is displayed with a thick dotted red line Each waypoint is represented with a circle around the waypoint A square encircles each waypoint A plain and thick line represents the lane The heading route of a leg is displayed in the middle of this leg Figure VII 13 Highligh
109. GSA E4 66205071 Pos 9ACE408 0307 1645641565339038B5BE595 DES1L600s 200 04 O5C4 O06 COP SSB2 B1400 CDF93B B CO4 YFCOCDOAGBSUFYS DE316004 200 S04 O58 5 SS6F LIAB SASRROROSSSF LIA BSASBREOAROSDSBBOSLISCBS 0 1 3 amp J DES1T6650200 70405 9RC4 2142 FO0DR 0K AE SBC4 21A FODRORAEEADCASEBADIDSBBLE 0 1 DEINORGOZUU O04 0 5B 55F BS 9156 SO0RBAABIOFBISLIESOOBAAFSAGEAFS fo S6BALZ 0 5 DR 4 BORNHZ00 P04 OS BL BAGS O24 SSI A024 SFRLBADS D2 S95 A004 sPRETADZCUSOCOSIESEB d DRA RATGNZ OO S04 O5SB2DCE9Cs 2ZODFOERSBZDCESCS2ZODFOER SB HL9FS 0 D4110 0 1 DR AR ATGES 200 7 0405 AHEODSACBLIBCI AS AREODSACBLIBC4I ADS 6DE ZO ESD 0 1 DR ANCOR SO2400 0405824092 AEOIDSSS Zee oo TAOS DOSS ZUEFEGZEDAA DO CAEG 0 1 DK 4 SKARK ZOO 04 050228401495 9R0R64 6228401493 9RDRBS4 699062 5548245420 0 7 DK 4 SUNDTZ00 7040555 FEBLOES4S50F 455 ZEEBRLOE ZA ZOE AA2 OBPCSe444 45EE0 0 9 DRS BORNHZ00 S040 585567554 50Fs49E0A855B 7554 s0Fs9E6A95 SCBFOIBZITDOESY 0 1 DR4AGSMONZ OO S04 OS DKF SFCOBADIBOUS 2DRFSFCOSADSIBOUS ZO 6FCS POF ZCHDDO ZZ 0 1 DRARATGN ZOO 0405 916065404 6601501 9155564 04 660 Ls01lssCeBlovscarys ZA 0 9 DR4ARATES ZOO 70405 59CF 564 480 PCP S045 9CF 64 480 PCP ROA 5CS9C J eBLFOSs99B1 0 1 DRA SUNDT 200 704 O5F O04 S086 4C6F4 SOE SFO4 DDOGACDEA OES OBSSSF P41 FOFC4 52 0 d DRIRGEBHZO0O P04 0 5C D004 BEDIs 7 97949 DUD BEDI37979493F93 eC 0 44 BE Good Oo d FRSOLOLO2Z00 704 058F 298FB961L6B1LAFHHF2OSFBSS6LOBLAFHEC AADS O6CCDB4299 0 35 0 FR
110. Gecdis this object is converted into Gecdis format SOFTWARE TO DISPLAY DATA FURTHERMORE KEEP IN MIND THAT THE NUMBER OF MARKS IS LIMITED TO BE CAREFUL THE AMOUNT OF DOWNLOADED DATA MAY INTERFERE WITH THE SPEED AND FLOW OF THE 1 MILLION Vil 2 4 1 TurboWin Turbo2000 Import You can import user data provided by TurboWin It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in TurboWin position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a TurboWin Turbo2000 user object folder 1 Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then Turbo2000 Directory 2 Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s 3 In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window To import several TurboWin Turbo2000 user objects folders In the System menu click Import User objects and then Multiple Turbo2000 Directories Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window Oo N ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 155 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 2 4 2 Gecdis Import Yo
111. HEM THE MAIN VIEW AND ALL OF ITS ELEMENTS MAY BE DISPROPORTIONATE Two possibilities to adjust the screen size e Automatic in this case the screens dimensions are determined automatically based on the placement of windows on the screens This is the most accurate and safest choice especially when changing or multi screens Displays connected and recognized by the system are listed in the upper area specifying their dimensions e Fixed size in this case the dimensions of the screen are entered manually This is useful if the connected display is not recognized by the system or if its size can not be known automatically eg with a video projector We Note on ECDIS compliance when the size of your screen is correctly configured Gecdis displays the cartographic texts ENC with a height of 3 5mm which corresponds to a nominal viewing distance of one meter 11 1 2 COLOUR MODES In ECDIS Calibrated display topic you can automatically calibrate screen connected to a serial port In this case you must select the type of display connected in the combo box The Black background in day mode option enables to display the cartographic in day mode with black background Normaly the background is white default configuration ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 25 x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The White background in dusk mode option enables to display the cartographic in dusk mode with white back
112. INCE DATA IS ENCRYPTED IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO USE IT ON OTHER SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS List of User Objects Marks 37 Display Hide gt lt Delete Move Objects Export pQ Marks 37 Folder E Areas 4 poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 632 M 007 20 135 E AQ Texts 1 poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 38 316 N 007 22 059 E D Tracks 383 poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 792 N 007 21 067 E L C Deleted Objects poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 38 306 N 007 21 245 E poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 867 M 007 21 793 E d Co e sermona eet Figure VII 3 User object select Ser SORE Save exported objects as Current format Current format Turbo 2000 format AML format C Users TSTO01 Desktop Nouveau dossieraze gdb Figure VII 4 Format select To export a user object 1 Open the list of user objects select the object s you want to export and click Export in the menu bar of this window 2 In the dialog box select the format of data to export Gecdis or TurboWin and click to search and select the destination database 3 You can also create a new database by entering the access path of a file that has not been created yet 4 Click Export and once the export process is done click Close ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 157 LA L_ LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 Routes VII 3 1 CREATING A ROUTE A route is a continuous itine
113. If you select the mark you have just created the consultation window gives you the details of the mark and allows you to edit it with context sensitive buttons 1 1 Mark MARK 2 x Name MARE 2 Folder Blue Date 2013 07 11 10 01 45 Comment Position 50 38 716 N 000 34 118 E Charted depth 0 000 m Submersion 0 000 m Symbol i ra Dangerous F Properties Shift Hide Delete Objects Filter Move Select Image Figure VII 21 Selecting a Mark If you know that you may use many times a mark with special characteristics you can define it so you won t need to create it whenever required To define a mark template 1 Click User Objects Marks and then Define Marks 2 Click New button Defined Marks 7 f x Name My type Colour RW ii Symbol kd OK Cancel Figure VII 22 New defined Mark 3 Inthe new dialog box enter a name compulsory choose a colour and a symbol and click OK 4 The name of the new mark is displayed Click Close 5 Click User Objects and point to Create Predefined Marks to display the label of the mark you have just created 172 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 iA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES User Objects Open Objects List Define Objects Filter Start Campaign Set Current Folder Select and Do Create Mark Create Mark with Cursor Define Mark Define Event Create Predefined Mark My type
114. LARC1 Chart CD United Kingdom 26 10 2006 Chart CD lt RC11 Chart CD United Kingdom 30 10 2003 RC4 Chart CD United Kingdom 23 03 2006 Figure V 53 Installing a Chart Disk Update In the main view updates are notified with an orange hatched square meaning that one or several update s have been made You can decide whether you display updates or not Squares will be hidden as shown in the following comparative drawings Yes 1 el E Je ee bm M Sh s a Fi yet Ad 25s Approach Channel see Note ki 23 Channel see Note ki 23 Figure v 54 Updates hidden Figure V 55 Updates displayed To display updates in the main view 1 Click the Charts menu and then Show Updates A mark is displayed in front of the submenu showing you that the option is enabled To install an update CD 1 Follow the same procedure as the chart CD installation by clicking the Charts menu Chart Disks the browse button and then selecting in the explorer the update CD 2 Click Install CD The CD is installed on your hard drive in the DATA folder you have created to load ARCS charts It is also added to the list of disks in the Installed Disk s pane V 3 2 4 Using ARCS Charts You can display several resolutions for the same main view You can decide Lea e To choose on your own your desired chart resolutions The and ba icons of the toolbar allow you to skip between these charts e Ifthe 8 icon
115. LCOME ciccia nnn R 1 NN Requested configuration ccccseeeecceceeeeeeceeeeaesseeeeecsaaseeeeeeseaseeeeesseaueeeessaaaeeeeessaaeeeeeesaeseees 1 NG Installation Uninstallation EE 2 Se Launching and Closing Gecdis ccceccceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeceeesseaeeeeeessaaeeeeeessaaseeees 4 1 2 HOW TO USE THE EQUIPMENT EEN 6 1 2 1 The Keyboard Short Cuts cccccccecccecccceeeceeeseeceeeeeseaeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaseeeeeeessssaaaeeeeees 6 1 2 2 ENENG WE EE 8 1 2 3 NS le EE 9 1 3 GECDIS e TT 10 1 3 1 WHS SCL SCN eege eege 10 1 3 2 TACCU EE 15 1 3 3 SHA VCS EE 16 1 3 4 Acen EIERE ene eee nee eee ee ere ene ne eee ere ee 16 LA IMPORTANT FEATURES TO te UE 17 1 4 1 THE DWN ONI EE 17 1 4 2 Senn Wel 0 co renee eee eee en ene eer eee 17 1 4 3 Man Over BOG EE 18 1 4 4 PANNO lg e WEE 18 1 4 5 Renee TE 19 1 5 WHAT TO DO Ten Cu TE 20 1 5 1 CU TOZI a a en ee ee 20 1 5 2 RVC ING EE 20 1 6 NAVIGATION TASKS cate gece tsceuetene to ceceectaeyactictan nino raa iaaii 22 1 6 1 EE 22 1 6 2 VOY AGE Luet D 22 1 6 3 FO SIMON Gl EE 23 1 6 4 be IMO ele EE 23 1 6 5 leie e e ME 24 Il QENERAL CONF IGUR e cascade ceded nes ect ad eee ec tecs teed eee eeeeeced ete 25 IN NIE NEE 25 INN EE 25 IG COOU MOE aE A E EES 25 1 1 3 DUNO WOME e ge E 26 II 2 CONFIGURING THE UNITS eebe 28 1 3 TR HI osesrciosivaes ceaeutaen seacuate cane nauhanniesivanes ceanstenseasucessconuhannuseausesesssdenseasetsssvannbnesusesseecersstesseseeess 29 1
116. LICATING A ROUTE Duplicating a route consists of copying a route you have already created This second route must overlap the first route If you do not modify the location of a waypoint in one of these routes you will only see one route To duplicate a route 1 Select a route you have already created 2 Inthe context sensitive buttons on the right of the screen click the Duplicate button 3 The Route Properties dialog box of the new route is displayed giving you the same details as those entered for the first route Do one of the following e Click OK This route is superimposed upon the first route You will optionally change it later on when required e Change the parameters as you want for this new route VII 3 5 REPRESENTATION OF A ROUTE The representation of the route depends on the status of the route Indeed a route can either be planned or alternate highlighted or not VII 3 5 1 Alternative route The route is still displayed with a thin and tight orange dotted line Each waypoint is represented with an orange circle whose centre is the waypoint If you have planned a route the planned speed for each leg is displayed in a small square sas D Cee ee EE ee rrr sr OM eg DNK DK KM eee o een eee D I ent eee DK EK gt ke mmm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm E mm mm mm mm ee Figure VII 10 Alternative route _ 162 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AVi ILA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSI
117. Latest Notice To Mariners 200205210 Latest Correction Issue Date 00 00 00 Figure V 56 General Information on ARCS Charts 1 Chart Number The number of the chart This piece of information is also displayed in the Chart List pane of the Chart Database dialog box Chart Title The name of the chart This piece of information is also displayed in the Chart List pane of the Chart Database dialog box Country of Origin The value of this field is normally set to United Kingdom because ARCS charts are produced by the UKHO Disk Number There are eleven chart disks This field shows to which disk the current chart belong in the following format RCx where x is the number of the disk Panel Number The number of the chart panel 0 means that the panel is a whole chart If the panel is only a part of a chart the value is different from 0 Panel Title The name of the panel which is displayed in the Panel List pane of the Chart Database dialog box Edition Number The number of the edition When the chart is edited for the first time 1 is displayed Edition Date The edition date of the panel File Issue Date The date when the file has been saved Raster Chart Issue Date The date when the chart has been edited This date should correspond to the edition date of the file ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 137 4 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Latest Notice to Mariners The code of the latest notice to mar
118. M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES Inconsistent Depth vw Enable Maximum Depth Difference value ELS 20 00 m Maximum Depth Difference Percentage ELS 10 00 Figure IV 10 Inconsistent depth alarm parameters To use inconsistent depth 4 4 5 In the System menu click Settings UO and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab In Inconsistent Depth check the Enable box and then do one of the following e To enter a difference in meters click Maximum Depth Difference Value ELS and then enter a value in the corresponding field e To enter a difference in percentage click Maximum Depth Difference Percentage ELS and then enter a value in the corresponding field Check the Periodic Report 30s box to generate an alarm each 30 seconds when there is an inconsistence in depths Click OK IV 4 2 TARGET AIS ALARMS A page allows configuring specific alarms to mobile AIS and ARPA targets NOT TO BE HAMPERED BY AN EXCESS OF ALARMS BUT ONLY THE MOST RELEVANT THESE ALARMS DO o NOT APPLY TO SLEEPING MOBILE Own Ship Specific Alarms Target Als Alarms High Speed vw Enable Alarm if speed over 20 00 kn 415 Detection vw Enable Import T SiWwMMISL ini MMSI Mame Comment 1195046 AKADEMIKIS VAVILOVS 209345000 ALMADIEP 211204950 211263320 JACOB BECKER 4212151000 AURIGA 2
119. O05 45 003 W Buoy shape super buoy Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Radar transponder beacon Radar wave length 0 03 0 10 S Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Signal group Mi Light Light characteristic flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 4 Yalue of nominal range 20 Information Height 10 metres above water surface Manual deletion Comment Feature manually moved to position 48 29 99676N OO5 45 0027 7 Author Administrator Created 09 07 2013 15 54 49 Move object Annotate abject Remove Annotations Figure V 26 Manually moved chart object V 2 11 2 5 Delete a chart object To delete a chart object that has been created manually 1 Select the object in the chart 2 In the consultation window click the Delete object button This button appears in the consultation window only if the object has been created manually V 2 11 2 6 Select fixed cell loading mode If you are using the automatic chart loading mode before create object you must first select a cell in the Fixed Cell dialog box Select fixed cell loading mode 1 Open the dialog with Display menu and select Chart Chart Display Mode and then click Fixed Cell ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 119 IX3L UE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Display Centre on Own Ship Orientation w Relative motion Centre on Place Scale Best Scale Window Zoom oom 10 oom Zoom
120. ORMATION Inheriting information is a process that consists in duplicating from a mobile to another one all pieces of information that are not already added to the latter This process implies a strong relationship between the two mobiles For example as soon as a piece of information is removed from the mobile that inherits information the piece of information will be inherited from the parent mobile Also if a piece of information is not assigned to a mobile that inherits information from another mobile which includes this piece of information it will be inherited in the first mobile as well To inherit information from a mobile 1 Click the Mobile menu and then Configuration ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 97 Gecdis v8 User s Manual aF DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 2 Inthe left hand pane of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box select the mobile you want to inherit information 3 Inthe Parent mobile scrolling list select the mobile from which you want to inherit information an Some route or AIS system informations are automatically inherited the Own Ship IV 6 7 SENSOR SYNTHESIS The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box allows you to configure system information streams that allow to receive information from sensors and mobiles and fleets The configuration may be complex and numerous It is not possible to display all of them at the same time in the Input Output amp Mobile Configu
121. RPER SENSES V 3 2 CHARTS V 3 2 1 The Chart Database All licensed charts are gathered within a chart database Information about those charts can be checked in the Chart Database dialog box Each chart of the database is associated with four pieces of information in four columns that it is possible to sort The chart number The name of the chart The chart CD ROM from which the chart has been loaded The edition date Each chart contains one or more panel s A panel is a chart or a chart part So when you select a chart on the left of the dialog box its associated panels are displayed on the upper right part If you select one of the panels associated information about this panel are displayed in the lower right part Information depends on the selected panel There might be two alternatives e lf the panel represents a whole chart the value of the Panel Number field is 0 e lf the panel represents a part or an element of a chart the value of the Panel Number field is any number except 0 In that case several panels might be listed ranging from 1 to the number of parts of the chart e g 3 if the chart is divided into three parts Sometimes a chart might not have a panel whose Panel Number is 0 In such cases the chart gathers independent charts So there is no main panel Chart List WE h E Panel list Panel info Cabo de Santa Maria to Cabo Trafalgar RC1 16 03 21 EENES SE ACEN Centre 53 16 977 N 001 46 882 E
122. S0 04 13079N O00 OS 40260E P UTC 09007 2013 10 50 31 Apply with iBlue position Sow 000kn True heading 080 007 Drift vector Speed 0 00 kn Set O95 00 Other Information ER leeway angle MM value 10 00 OK Cancel Figure IV 45 Dead Reckoning a Mobile To dead reckon a mobile 1 Access the Dead Reckoning dialog box clicking Mobile and then Dead Reckoning 2 Inthe list of mobiles in the upper scrolling list select the mobile you want to dead reckon 3 To assign a new position to a mobile click and then the main view where you want to locate your mobile or enter a new position in the position editable field 4 Inthe UTC field enter the date and time when the mobile has been dead reckoned you may have dead reckoned the position before entering it 5 Enter the SOW and true heading To enter those values the pieces of information must have been added to the mobile and their source must be Estimate 6 Enter the drift soeed and set To enter those values the pieces of information must have been added to the mobile and the source of this information must be Estimate 7 Optionally dead reckon the other pieces of information selecting it in Other Information and entering the value for this piece of information in Value 8 Click Apply to see your modifications or click OK to close the dialog box ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 101 x z3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 8
123. SHARPER SENSES IA The Toolbar By default the toolbar contains several icons associated with major commands man over board zoom zoom centre on Own Ship but with Gecdis you are not limited only to these actions you can add any button representing the actions you use more frequently So you can create a toolbar customized to your activity and your needs 11 4 1 INSERT A NEW BUTTON Configuration Security Miscellaneous User Interface Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms vw Use lange buttons w Show tooltips e Toolbar 1 Toolbar 2 oF ZOOM OWN SHIP Insert Button Delete ba A t a MAP ajl s Image Display Zoom T p gt Tooltip OOM Button Menu Command With Separator OK Cancel Apply Figure II 6 Configuring the Toolbar To create a shortcut button in the toolbar 1 In the System menu click Settings and the General Configuration or right click directly on the toolbar and then select Customize On the Configuration dialog box click the Toolbar tab On the Toolbar page select the button where you want insert after your newbutton After select emplacement click Insert button The new button is added to the desired location You need to select in the tree structure of menu the associated command for the new buiton Items already in the toolbar are automatically disabled 6 Select an icon from the library by clicking the button Image or browsing
124. Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Raising Alarms Siecle ke 30 m Fafe mode Unsafe mode Shallow contour 2 m p Safety contour 30 m Safety depth 30 m Deep contour 230 m Safe chart scale LI 40000 Default values OK Cancel Apple Figure V 7 Default configuration To display the options 1 Inthe System menu select Settings Charts and then Objects Detection V 2 2 CHART DATABASE PRESENTATION The Database Content dialog box is lockable unlockable and allows you to manage the cells of the chart database Charts Database x Charts Catalogue Charts History Permits 5A Certificate 2 Name Edition Usage Scale Issue Date Application Last Manual Update a AU210140 1 4 General 1 1 500 000 25 11 2005 10 06 2005 4U210150 ol Genera 1 1 500 000 25 11 2005 10 06 2005 Import Commercial 4U220140 1 3 General 1 1 500 000 30 09 2005 10 06 2005 Exchange Set 4220150 1 0 General 1 1 500 000 10 06 2005 10 06 2005 AU230140 1 0 General 171500000 10 06 2005 10 06 2005 Import Catalogue AU230150 1 0 General 1 1 500 000 10 06 2005 10 06 2005 AU314145 4 0 Coastal 1 90000 07 01 2005 07 01 2005 Import Cells AU315146 4 0 Coastal 1 90000 07 01 2005 07 01 2005 AU318147 2 0 Coastal 1 90000 07 01 2005 07 01 2005 Reset Database AU319147 2 1 Coastal 1 90 000 11 11 2005 07 01 2005 X Figure V 8 ENC Chart Database Tab Description Charts Lists all available cells with a set of information Name name of the cell
125. Scale Chrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom 10 Zoom F3 zoom FA Zoom 10 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Charts Chart Display Mode amp vg Automatic Ste Chart Informations Fixed Usage Overview Chart Objects Fixed Cell General ae DE Obj vw Planisphere In Background SEH w True vectors Harbour Berthing User Objects Groups To use the manual loading of a chart Figure V 20 Fixed usage menu 1 In Charts menu select Chart Loading Mode and then Fixed Cell 2 Inthe Fixed Cell dialog box select the cell to be displayed E Fixed Cell S X Name Edition Usage Scale Issue Date Application _ BES LBNK 16 6 Coastal 1 90 000 26 03 2010 06 04 2009 BE4VLBNK 4 7 Approach 1 45 000 26 03 2010 06 04 2009 BESANT WIN 12 8 Harbour 1 22 000 06 07 2010 12 10 2009 BESANT WZ 8 8 Harbour 1 12 000 17 05 2010 01 10 2008 BESKGETE 2 0 Harbour 1 12 000 02709 2009 02 09 2009 BESOOSTE 6 0 Harbour 1 4000 12 02 2010 12 02 2010 BESZEEBR 5 0 Harbour 1 4000 23 03 2010 23 03 2010 BH450064 3 0 Approach 1 45 000 05 07 2010 05 07 2010 BH465014 4 0 Approach 1 45 000 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 BHS15014 4 0 Harbour 1 12 000 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 E5200303 2 30 General 1 700 000 07 07 2010 24 06 2008 E5201080 LP General 1 700 000 22 04 2010 12 08 2005 E5201082 1 15 General 1 700 000 25 06 2010 09 07 2008 E5201083 Ko General 1 700 000 26 05 2010 28 07 2008 zi F Show only visible cells Figure V 21 Manual Loading of a Chart 3 Sh
126. Server Address DGerveur o 3 File Emission k w o UTZ E ER ARPA Range x 4 F Add Delete Clase Apply Figure IV 28 TCP stream client configured with a server name a System a TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying FF COMI GPS mz SZ NETI UDP Comment SServeur I 3 TCP 1 555erveur oe TCP Z E Input datum e ZH II NMEA output fe ML output Fort 1001 Server Address oP File Emission k Sa eo UTZ E A ER ARPA Range x 4 F add Delete Close Apply Figure IV 29 Configuring a TCP stream server To use a TCP Stream 1 Select the desired TCP stream in the left hand list of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box 2 Inthe Port field of the TCP Stream tab enter the number of the port to be used 3 If you have a client machine in Server Address enter either the name of the server machine or its IP address To learn more about finding the IP address of a machine see Finding the IP Address of a Machine 4 Optionally fill the Comment field The comment is displayed into brackets in the left hand list after the ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 89 iA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES name of the network stream 5 Clicking allows you to check incoming and outgoing data IV 6 2 2 3 Finding the IP Address of a Machine o S system a System Network Parameters AIS Fem iBlue Gei ixBlue DR z E Position sek Computer name wb _winsp lf Position reference ER UT
127. System Source Checking Corrections Filtering Trawl net Position AGB Position port side So ER Position starboard ER Warp length Position Filtering by threshold e 40 nl ves EN Eccentricity Pie tt fav ER Submersion Filtering is only used with a real acquisition source sal Horizontal spread Add Delete Close Apply Figure D 3 Trawl net filtering Note To highlight the filtering on the following examples a GAPS fleet has been added in addition to the trawl net which allows you to view the trail on the panels green Before filtering we note two jumps one on the starboard panel mobile one and the center position orange Ei di 2 ee Kee e y mm wm Figure D 4 Before filtering After filtering there is only one jump the mobile fleet one of the GAPS unfiltered Orange center trace was not deflected Keesen Figure D 5 After filtering ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 203 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Appendix E SHIP OUTLINE The file describing the ship s outline includes the key words used to identify the different ship s parameters followed by their values The parameters are delimited with square brackets and It is highly important to respect the parameters orders The ship is always represented with the stem bow on top X axis is incremented to the right Y axis to the top The couple of points 0
128. U Zoom e Zoom F4 Zoom 10 Chart Display Mode Chart Informations E Colour Mode Base Ecdis Mode w Standard Hide Al User Obj Full True Vectors A Custom Delete Custom Display False Maniar User Objects Groups Figure V 33 Chart Objects menu 122 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The ENC module allows you to display or not many data in the chart There are three types of chart data display Display Base Standard Display and Full Display Their difference lies in the chart objects they allow to display If you are not satisfied with a specific level you can customize the chart display by defining a filter and then save the filter assigning it a name You can save as many filters as desired So you can fastly change the display depending on your sailing habits Information to be displayed is arranged in a tree with branches it is possible to expand and reduce So some categores such as Beacon includes a list of object in lower levels Beacon cardinal Beacon lateral etc Checkboxes are represented as follows e o The objetc is alwoays displayed because it belongs to the basic mode e Hl Displays in front of the objects that represents a category Some objects of this category are displayed but not all of them e The object is displayed If the cross appears in front of an obj
129. Vecteur surface Cap vrai Profondeur 51 08 673 N 001 16 956 E 5 2 kn 325 0 10 0 kn 250 0 240 0 wt Mobiles List Appearance Configuration amp own Ship Centre Track Start Position conning ao COG SOW ARS Fleets a 2 Name Age Ships ixBlue 1 05 J als ae i ixBlue DR Ip arpa ais 50 56 685N 001 39 044E 18 0kn 098 0 18 0kn 51 08 673N O001 16 956E S 2kn 325 0 10 0 ma ey v i Ai gt Ka ES 12 24 00 B 51 04 729N 001 25 256E 127 0 6 554 NM 1h 15min 09 23 38 Own Ship Inconsistent pos ixBlue difference 1 428 nM V ACK 2 Figure II 21 Active window example with the main view 40 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 The active window is identified with the color of the title bar that is different from others xXSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 9 2 2 TurboWin mode The TurboWin mode enables to activate an interaction mode close to the mode used by TurboWin software This mode is very special because it attempts to replicate the old ergonomics TurboWin and Turbo2000 with a horizontal menu bar at the bottom of the screen where the mouse cursor is locked Warnimg ou didn t choose to detect all the dangers oe soe fe e Pa SW 1 b J f 4 kt AY SR 12 36 11 B 50 57 875 N 001 43 603 E 10 35 13 A Own Ship Figure II 22 TurboWin mode
130. WM 37min 18s Figure 14 The status bar It is mainly composed with information in order Local time with timezone letter Cursor position or screen center Bearing Ownship Cursor Distance Ownship Cursor TTG Ownship Cursor 1 3 1 5 Toolbars The toolbar serves as an easy to use interface for performing common functions It enables you to speed up the implementation of specific actions by a single click on a button Be Ss ew Be ebe Figure 1 15 Upper toolbar There are 2 main toolbars e The upper toolbar horizontal with functions for navigation and security navigation e And the lateral toolbar vertical displaying the main functions for fishing operation and the access to optional expert modules As for specific requirements the skipper or the operator when installing the application can create modify the commands for each toolbar WHEN THE MENU BAR IS NOT DISPLAYED E G IF A GUESTS TYPED USER IS LOGGED ON YOU CANNOT CLOSE THE TOOLBAR 1 3 1 6 Information windows 1 3 1 6 1 Critical information The banner with critical information enables to display data types that have been previously selected They are related to the ownship or to the cursor and are provided by the sensors or computed To display the critical information window you must select the corresponding command in the View menu When a piece of information is not available incorrect or nonexistent the corresponding field is filled
131. a new edition of a CD that you have already copied you needn t uninstall it before installing the new edition The folder of the old version is kept during the whole importation process If importation is correct the previous edition is deleted and replaced by the new one Otherwise it Is unchanged So you will never lose data 134 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 ix E L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES m Install CD ARCS charts to import D i AE Install mInstalled disks WKIZ 07 Update CD United Kingdom 15 02 2007 Uninstall RC1 Chart CD United Kingdom 26 10 2006 RC11 Chart CD United Kingdom 30 10 2003 RC4 Chart CD United Kingdom 23 03 2006 Figure V 52 Importing a Chart Disk To install a CD 1 Click the Charts menu Chart Disks the browse button zl and then select the folder into which you can find the charts you want to install If you want to install a CD insert it in the CD ROM drive and then select the unit that represents the CD ROM drive D in the above example Click OK 2 Click Install CD Validate the message that warns you the install process will take several minutes The CD is installed in the Data folder from which you have chosen to load ARCS charts 3 Once installed a message tells you the import process is over Click OK and then Close in the chart installation dialog box To uninstall a CD 1 Inthe Installed Disk s
132. a very important command in Gecdis This command is available in different ways e Inthe menu Navigation by selecting the first line Man Over Board e Inthe horizontal toolbar by default there is a assigned button e With the shortcut F8 key This command is not confirmed a man overboard is created just after validation A visible symbol corresponding to the event is created at the Own Ship position and bearing range line is added LA A PRINTING THE SCREEN Anytime the software allows you to print the main view as shown in the screen provided with mobiles and user objects Everything outside the main view views bars and even dialog boxes does not appear in the printout Anytime the software allows you to print the contents of the screen as shown This function is included in the System menu For greater convenience you could press the Print Screen key of your keyboard This key allows you to access directly the Windows print dialog box The default orientation of the print is always fixed in landscape mode 18 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q l x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Overscale x1 5 Soundings Heights in m tres Affichage Complet 51 06 188 N 001 26 590 E Gecdis v8 19 06 2013 13 47 13 ee E 8 7 Wee GOODWIN SANDS gt geng D KL S at g mer e ez P pr sn 4 ati u ENC Mercator 1 50 000 WGS84 cD gg Siem E D F Z 20s 15M Serie w EE
133. a waypoint e Press the keyboard TAB key to switch between the Name and the Position columns 5 Click OK to save the route 158 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q x 3L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual D a at D Figure VII 6 A route VII 3 2 ROUTE PROPERTIES By route properties we mean information entered to create this route The Route Properties dialog box is the following Name MA Comment Waypoints B Nr Mame Position Route Range Remains Total Range Max STE Turn Radius Speed Comment l dl S0 40 022 N O00 S9 444 E 13 82 NM 0 0000 rm 18 0 kn 2 60 36 1 32 N 000 S5 650 E Gall oF 3 053 NM 10 77 WM 3 053 WM 1000 m 100 0 m 18 0 kn 3 50937661 M 000 30 139 E 262 57 3 555 NM 7 214 NM 6 608 MM 1000 m 100 0 m 18 0 kn 4 50 35 855 M 000 19 175 E 255 59 7 214 NM 0 0000 m 13 82 MM 1000 m ek D d Show great circles detail OK Cancel Figure VII 7 Route properties dialog VII 3 2 1 Route Fields VII 3 2 1 1 Name Name of the route By default the name is Route VII 3 2 1 2 Comment Add any comment on the route VII 3 2 2 Waypoints Fields Each line of the table matches a waypoint and when you double click on a line you can edit the waypoint properties It s equivalent to click on the EI button VII 3 2 2 1 Index Number of the waypoint It is incremented by one for each new waypoint VII 3 2 2 2 Name Name of the waypoint You can edit this field by
134. be preoccupied with the format of the data to be used Indeed the SENC cartographic module does not display ENCs but a system of electronic navigational charts Moreover the ENC standard is considered as an exchange format especially by the institutions that have defined it and it is strongly recommended to use another format to get the required performance This standard is an exchange format and also an independent format for the platform being used Moreover the user can profit by a presentation of his cells because the data import is accompanied with a data sorting structure V 2 1 1 Launching the ENC module The first time you launch the ENC module no chart is loaded and you have to import a set of charts Import d Print Settings General Configuration Log OFF Administrator Chart Provider Planisphere Exit LO and Mobiles V Projection ARCS Charts User Objects V Charte Catalogue Tracks V Figure V 6 Launching the ENC Module To launch the ENC module 1 Click the System menu select Settings Charts and then Chart Provider 2 Click ENCs V 2 1 2 Default Configuration Some commands of the ENC module allows you to choose between several options and other commands can be edited Some default values or options are configured If you change them your modification will be taken into account until you change them again 106 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual
135. box click the Add button point to Stream and click the stream you wish to use COM if you wish to recover data from your GPS 2 After configuring the stream click System Import User objects and then select Route from NMEA 3 As far as information about routes are not received the Waiting NMEA sentences warning message is displayed The import report is displayed into the Report window So if the import process has failed you can know why Finally the main view is centred on the route you have imported The import process can t be carried out towards file streams To export a route 1 Select a route that is not currently used and in the consultation window click Export 2 Select an output stream i e the stream to use to export the route 3 Click OK 4 You can check transmitted data by clicking the magnifying glass icon of the Stream Configuration dialog box Then select Output in the contextual menu of the grey window that displays ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 167 x z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VILLA Tracks VII 4 1 STARTING STOPPING A TRACK It is possible to start stop a track for any mobile To start stop the Own Ship s track 1 Click Mobile and then click Start Own Ship Track 2 To stop the track click Stop Own Ship Track To start stop any mobile s track 1 Starting stoping the track is done by using the toolbar icon or via the Mobile list 2 Click Mobil
136. ce all ranges are configured repeat the steps for all parameters you want and then click OK Parameter Colours From 5 0 kn From 10 0 kn From 15 0 kn From 20 0 kn From 25 0 kn III CH wy a D Figure VII 18 Track color filters dialog gr IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOUR SEE 1 4 2 PAGE 17 VII 4 4 DISPLAYING THE TRACK PROFILE The profile of a track gives you the evolution of this track depending on a range or on the evolution of a specific parameter To see the profile of a track 1 Select the track 2 Inthe context sensitive buttons right part of the screen click the Profile button The track profile displays in the lower part of the screen You can now choose to display a specific range or parameter Sa HEET DESERT IERT EELNEASIEETEEEEEEL aE List of User Objects Black Box 381 1088 List of Mobiles Whole Track Z Charted depth ha 0 000 rr 1000 m Figure VII 19 Track profile window VII 4 4 1 Title bar Status bar showing the name of the tracked mobile as well as the creation date of the track VII 4 4 2 First scrolling list To display only a part of the track You can either display a distance that ranges from 1 nm to 1000 nm of the track or the whole track If you select a value that is superior to the length of the track the whole track is displayed VII 4 4 3 Second scrolling list This scrolling list allows you to select one o
137. ceceuecesaueceeaeecetanecs 79 specific e 95 Static EE 93 steering course autopilot sessseesssseressreresrreresssrresserress 164 Gecdis v8 User s Manual stream Eege 88 Stream Elle 90 Ke E 89 SS AIG T E E A A E E A 86 KENE 91 SEENEN geet 85 Swayne e 85 SMSen eege 85 Sy AMOS rnrn e AE E E EE A E 80 Synchronizing e vcawsusnnescoiscnnidwcscnvesncadwweewsventenoseciuedncsanens 37 system information sisacsaccvasssicascadedcasstevsedncederasenaceaceesaasiiads 82 system information CONT UN O DEEN 82 T EI Er AE E EN E AE E E N E E T N 92 TEE 89 He Aaaa E A O uavaeeaeees 69 ZON a nenmuucetoapeascapsneeteansonnssaneauaaeoss Sennnenvons 82 CONME e 82 ToD iaa EAA E ET ere rr 30 inserting a button 30 Tooltips ein E e RE 39 track ES 169 WACK UE 9 mue e EN 84 A CS e EE 86 GEI 64 TULDOWIN mode 41 U IK 87 EE 87 User ele We EE 33 User interface COT DH e RE 39 MS US ee 33 Users E 33 OK Le 82 UTC of reference position 84 V NO as oo ype cee gence nares E EEE EEEE EE EE E 75 VIEW MENU EE 59 V yage En 22 eege 140 W NEIE il Z zone Creaton S97 usia 121 208 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 K L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 209
138. chors 63 IV 1 2 Apparent Wind and True Wind cccceecccccseeeeeeceeeeeecaeeeeeeseaseeeceaeeeesaaaeeeeseaseeesseeeesaageees 64 W2 e 65 I EE 65 Ve Ee aaicavsaincnauec tens aucanciumseveumecsotucianartaaieusonam E E E aie aodinaet 66 IV 2 3 ee D fe at 66 V IE INO BILE LIST EE 67 V WE TE oe ene ee ee ree ee eee ee nee eee eee ee 69 IV 4 1 Own Ship Specific Alamms 69 WA 21 0 2 102 WE EE 71 IV 5 TE Le EE 74 IV 5 1 Defining a Mobile Apopearance 74 IV 5 2 Standard representation ccccccessccccccssssececcceeseeeeeceeegeeceeeseegeeceeeeeegseeeesseegeeeeessaageeeesenaess 76 IV 5 3 Defining a Specific Appearance for a Mobile or aleet 79 V OO CONFIGURATION E 82 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual IV 6 1 WAM ON ITT OW ME 82 Pe EE 86 IV 6 3 Creating Mobiles and Fleets cccccccsssseceeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessaaeeeeessseaeeeeeessgeeeeeneas 93 IV 6 4 Assigning Information to a Mobile 94 IV 6 5 Configuring Information cece ecccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeesesaeaeeeeeeeeesseaaeeeeeeeseaas 94 V give die Rive duu e Tu E 97 Wee SENSO VEG Eege EE 98 IV 7 DEAD RECKONING E 101 POSITION E 102 IV 8 1 FIXING DOSIIOM E 102 V82 Display Of TIX DOSINONS ciisintecniatiiessitentsvesmanearsiaaudsanintdesanitiadineneinaedvaiedinnivtdannieiindiemr iiaders 102 IV 8 3 Fix position settings EE 102 V e EC 103 Vi CHART GATALOGUE
139. clicking the desired cell and entering a name VII 3 2 2 3 Position Position of the selected waypoint ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 159 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 2 2 4 Route Route to follow for the previous leg This field is not filled in for the first waypoint because when a route is indicated for a waypoint it concerns the leg linking the current waypoint to the previous one VII 3 2 2 5 Range Distance between the selected waypoint and the previous waypoint This distance is expressed in nautical miles VII 3 2 2 6 Remains Distance that remains to run in the route The first cell of the Remains column is equal to the last cell of the Total Range column VII 3 2 2 7 Total range Distance from the departure to the selected waypoint The last cell of the Total Range column is equal to the first cell of the Remains column VII 3 2 2 8 Max XTE Cross Track Error Distance on each side of the route that the ship shall not pass If this occurs an alarm is generated This field is not filled for the first waypoint VIIL 3 2 2 9 Turn radius This field corresponds to the turn radius starboard System menu Settings I O Mobiles and Own Ship Characteristics Navigation tab It is not filled for the first waypoint and the last waypoint V1I 3 2 2 10 Comment Comment of the waypoint VII 3 2 3 The toolbar commands In the lower part of the dialog box there are several icons allowing
140. compilation scale Over scaling may arise from deliberate over scaling by the mariner or from automatic over scaling by ECDIS in compiling a display when the data included is at various scales Information displayed at a display scale greater than the compilation scale This may be done deliberately by the user or it may occur automatically during display compilation if the data relate to different scales Own Ship Cursor Bearing relative to the geographical north between the Own Ship and the Bearing cursor Rocking movement of a mobile in length direction Pivoting Position Location of the ship from which it pivots Position bow The frontal position of the ship that can be defined in the Sizes tab of Own Ship characteristics Position stern The back position of the ship Presentation Library The library of symbols defined in the display specifications in S 52 appendix 2 Colour and Symbol Specifications for ECDIS It contains the following pages Information about the chart display Shore features ports Depth currents Seabed obstructions pipelines Routes Special areas Buoys beacons lights radar Paper charts buoys and beacons Mariner s symbols The presentation library is available in hard copy or in digital form The symbols shall be replicated in size and shape using any convenient format The colour tables shall be reproduces within the tolerances given in S 52 appendix 2 5 2 3 The remaining items may be
141. crire 103 V 1 1 Displaying the chart coverage cccccseccccseseeccceeeeeccenseecceeseeecsaeeeeseseeessadeeeesauseesseneeeeees 103 V 1 2 ENS TO CM ALS EE 104 V 1 3 POTNO ONA Steers sist peregrine cts sneic es etseis te ee ae acca E E eee ese ees 104 V 1 4 Displaying the planisphere in background 105 V 2 ENC CHARTS IXBLUE FORMAT ccccssseeccssseeccenseeeceenseeeceseeeconsseecoaseesonnseesoonseessonseessones 106 V 2 1 PWR US UN WE 106 V 2 2 Chart database presentation Seteieg eebe ee geen 107 V 2 3 Managing the Chart database n00annnnnaannnnnnennnnensnnnnnnnrnrnnnnsrnrnrrsnnrnrensnnrrrnsnnnerennenenen 109 V 2 4 Getting AN import report 111 V 2 5 Getting information ON the cells cccccccccseccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeesssaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaas 112 V 2 6 Reseting the database ccccccssssccccccssseecesceeeeeeceeseeesseeeeceeaseeeeessauaeceesssaasecesessaaeeeeesaaaes 112 V 2 7 Centring the Chart arezaonacell ceecccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeeeeeaas 112 V 2 8 Importing deleting user permits cccceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeessaeeeeesesaaeeeeeeeas 112 V 2 9 Loddno UIC ANG S sae EEE E E R TEE 114 V 2 10 Chart Loading MOES EE 114 Verr UPOAN o A ee 115 V 2 12 Chart PrESCNTALON wee erennere gh enee D b gd eech Zeg deer eeh 122 V 2 13 Danger detection or anti grounding ss ssssssnnessnreesrnrrsrnresrrrrrsrrrrrnrrnsrrrrnnnrrrsr
142. d The folder defaults to Gecdis Data Receiving Optionally change it clicking the Browse button browsing to your desired folder and clicking OK The folder you will specify must exist if not first create it in your explorer and be empty 4 Optionally specify a comment in the Comment zone The comment you may have entered is displayed 90 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 D lt L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES into brackets opposite the name of the file in the left hand list 5 Optionally scroll the File type list and select a file type 6 Click Apply IV 6 2 4 Spying Input and Output Data Spying consists in saving in a file input and or output data in order to check its contents The files will be saved in the Gecdis Settings lo Mobiles folder and they will have a spy extension spy E a System a TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying Sf COMI GPS 3 NET1 UDF H TCP 555erveur D FILE1 e Sa E Input datum UTC On Input TCP1_Inspy AGP ARPA Range z AGP ARPA Marker On Output TCP1_Out spy Breve if Ant Band type we TCP Add Delete Close Apply Figure IV 32 Spying a stream To spy input and or output data 1 In the left hand list of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box select the communication port whose data you want to spy 2 Click the Spying tab 3 Doone of the following or both e f you want to spy incoming data check the On Input
143. d several functionalities If the current chart provider is not compliant ECDIS no map data will be displayed The cursor has the same shapes as those defined by the ECDIS see 1 3 2 page 15 The user objects follow ECDIS appearance they are orange The symbol of event objects is drawn with special icon MOB for example Some settings that relate to ships appearances cannot be performed see IV 5 page 98 So ship s appearance and the representation of its vectors labels etc may be different e The critical information window is docked if it were floating on the main view chart display mode only e The inconsistent position alarm is forced to activate if it was inactive ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 17 amp x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual SSE 25 The ENC permit for this cell has expired This cell may be out of date and MUSTINOT be used For NAVIGATION i Warning v u didn t choose to detect all the dangers 1 i uw H 50 48 N h i ALMADIEP 7 e EE EE e GE d SEET GEET EE ee mat d A ce EE EE R i fi Mm aie Pec aig Me ee a ee ee d SE 001 22 S0E 001 25 00E 001 22 SOE 001 25 00E Figure 1 22 ECS mode Figure 1 23 ECDIS mode In this case mobile appearence is non ECDIS user In this case mobile appearence is ECDIS forced objects have their own colors and user objects are always drawn in orange 1 4 3 MAN OVER BOARD Man Over Board is
144. d value at a regular rate s software value The software only informations are not presented here D 4 1 SYSTEM INFORMATIONS These informations are related to the overall system UTC S iXSea PIXSE TIME _ MARELEC MA DD m iXSea PIXSE HSPOS_ e S ll Dee KR EN DA 2 OWN SHIP SYSTEM INFORMATIONS These informations which the sensors are usually only can be inherited across all own ships Informations NMEA IXMloFormatEx Rudder centre starboard RSA and port Propeller pitch centre R starboard and port 198 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 i L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Propeller speed centre RPM e Starboard and port Wind speed true MWD Wind bearing true MWV VWT MDA CHAUVIN ARNOUX Thermometer CHAUVIN ARNOUX Thermometer Water temperature Air temperature Wind bearing apparent S e KS e e e e e E e Absolute humidity em e ES e w O y maea RER ere 1 Il D A3 OWN SHIP INFORMATIONS Position e GGA iXSea SPIXSE POSITI m GNS iXSea PIXSE GPSIN_ RMC iXSea SPIXSE GP2IN SCH iXSea SPIXSE USBIN ue iXSea SPIXSE HSPOS THALES SPRPS POSL 001 THALES SPRPS POSL 002 THALES SPRPS POSL 003 THALES SPRPS POSL 004 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 199 NW L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES SR True heading JRC SPJRCD GEM Microtecnica gryo iXSea SPIXSE HSATIT
145. deasies 70 inconsistent POSITIONS ssesssessesssessrrsreesrresersrresersreese 70 Own Ship characteristics ccccssssccccesseccecseseceeeeeeeceeseeeeees 65 p Sb WAG Ee 75 piece of information ale Wa E 94 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 207 Q DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES pilot to one wavpoint 165 PIIIOE E 60 PU OWNS EIN aere err EAE E eaesann ceaeedeveewerennes 146 ail ll 85 Planning a e E 22 position Se 84 EE 84 viel 84 EE 84 AE OA EE 84 positioning adjustment ccseeeccecessecceceeeeceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeees 96 RES DESEN 183 Presentation LIDrary sscccccssssccssssssccsssssscscsssssencessscess 124 profile e 169 gualty of dala EE 183 R are OT EE 85 Viel 147 Relative win 64 IRE ING tee 184 ail lit 85 Route ele EE 22 NSIS sc sctacascepesduacnetedaesnnestuessenateerneradeanwenadeaenancsemmnenieast 22 S SAI SLY eene E 184 SAR EICHER e Tt 150 SOCION TOUTE eege 149 SQUAre spiral route 148 SE EE 148 SCAG P E 46 SCAMIN EEN 74 Screen 32 2 e A E EN EN E E ee ee 10 Ee 25 EIERE 125 ER 184 sentences EVE I NS ee 92 hexadecimal format 87 Sentences ge E HIS SION EEN 91 Session OPE NINE ee 34 shallow CONTOUP sssisssssssssssrssrsossinsssssnsssssvesrssisssssissnossssisorsai 184 SHOT OUE E 6 Sizes of the Own Ship ssssnsssssenssereressrersssreressreressreressreressne 65 Eeer 63 84 Source Lab 95 eege 63 84 specific appearance cecccceeecccesececeeceeeee
146. e 40008 IXMIoMobile 40016 IXMIoMobile 40017 IXMIoMobile 40022 IXMIoMoabile Annes TYMTalichila Display Select All Base Unselect All Standard All OK Cancel e Filter Figure IIl 18 Customizing the Event Display 2 Select the events to be displayed 3 Click OK For example if you want to control the geographical positions of the last 12 hours you can filter the events required by ECDIS standard to do this 1 Deselect all the events by clicking the Unselect All button 2 Check the box corresponding to the event 40008 of the IXMloMobile source see Figure Ill 18 Customizing the Event Display ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 57 Gecdis v8 User s Manual h PR E KN DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 3 Click OK Black Box 238 72828 Title Type A Date Receipt Date Id Source Text User i Information Mo OFf07 12013 06 24 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 51 01 130 N 001 25 394 E lt Wese4 gt Valid Administrator 2 Information No 01 07 2013 16 00 00 40008 IsMioMobie Own Ship ele CR 51 00 628 N 001 25 S94 E lt WiGased gt Valid Administrator i Information Mo 8 26 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 294 N 001 25 394 E lt Wieso4 gt Valid Administrator Information No 2706 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ele DR 51 OS S09 N 001 47107 E lt Wesed gt Valid Administrator Information Mo 27062013 12 00 00
147. e Check of the route e Check of the dangers of the route Voyage optimisation e Time table optimisation e Optimisation based on economical factors e ECDIS processor calculates optimum speed and course between each waypoint and the ETA following specified data 1 6 2 3 Chart Planning e Loading of new ENC charts e Updating existing ENC charts 22 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e User generated safe water areas 1 6 3 POSITIONING Positioning is the way to calculate and keep updated the position of the ship during a voyage The calculation of the position of the ship is based on available navigation sensors e Direct positioning of sensors e Dead reckoning e Manual correction 1 6 3 1 Direct positioning of sensors Satellite navigation systems e GPS navigator e GPS navigator with a differential correction facility DGPS 1 6 3 2 Dead reckoning equipment Ship s heading measurements devices e Gyro compass one or two e Magnetic compass e GPS gyro compass e Inertial unit Speed measuring devices Single axis speed logs Dual axis speed logs Radio navigation equipment Satellite navigation equipment 1 6 3 3 Manual Correction User inputs corrections for the position to adjust the position of the antennas relative to conning 1 6 4 STEERING MODES Steering includes all the different operation modes for steering in ord
148. e Distance 60 955 NM Bearing A gt B 243 005 Bearing B 4 061 896 Draw Great Circle Figure VI 6 Geographic calculations dialog To get the distance between two points 1 Select the option Compute bearings and ranges 2 Enter or use the ZZ button and click the main view to define the position of A point 3 Proceed the same way to define the position of B point The calculation result i e the distances and bearings between the two points is automatically displayed in the dialog box Geographic Calculations Bearing Range Calculations Ar 51 15 41368N 002 03 40058E KN E 50 4 2S5076N O00 3S7 80596E KN Rhumb Line Distance 60 959 NM Bearing 242 4497 Draw Rhumb Line Compute bearings and ranges Compute P Great Circle Distance 60 955 NM Bearing A gt B 243 005 061 5967 Bearing B 4 Draw Great Circle Figure VI 7 Distance result To get the position of a point according to an origin and value of distance and or bearing 1 Select the option Compute B 2 Enter or use the button and click the main view to define the position of A point 144 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 3 Modify any value of the Rhumb Line and or Great Circle fields B point s position is automatically displayed in the dialog box Figure VI 8 Position calculation
149. e the Chart Disks dialog box is displayed To install a CD click and then select in the new window the folder in which there are the charts you want to install Click Install CD 8 When launching the ARCS module Charts menu gt Modules gt Chart Catalogue the Pin entry dialog box is displayed Enter your PIN number the blank field and then click OK To launch the ARCS module for the second time 1 When launching the ARCS module either when launching Gecdis or from the Charts menu the PIN entry dialog box is displayed Enter your PIN number in the blank field and then click OK Fixed site Enter your PIN code REG Sodena Licence type i Navigator Service 30 Avenue de L Amiral User permit C23CD4D01FOZ4644 Marly le Roi Licensee Marie Claude Flechais France 73160 Vessel name SHORE Host system name This licence is only walid iF the chart permits on this system are licensed to the person or compagny named above IF you are not the named person or do not represent the named compagny you may be in breach of the licence conditions relating ta the use of these charts IF in doubt please contact your nearest ARCS supplier Got Figure V 50 Managing the PIN Code IF YOU DELETE OR MOVE THE ARCS FOLDER WHEN GECDIS IS CLOSED YOU WILL HAVE TO REPEAT THE e FIRST LAUNCHING PROCEDURE OF THE ARCS MODULE ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 133 D A L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHA
150. e and Open the mobile list 3 Inthe dialog box that displays select the ships or fleets for which you want to start a track and then click Start 4 The tracks start 5 To stop some of the tracks or all of them click Mobile open the list of mobiles select the mobiles for which you want to stop a track and then click Stop VII 4 2 TRACK TEMPLATES To configure a track template 1 Inthe System menu Settings Tracks and then Own ship Track recording Check parameters to record in track Parameter Sampling wv Position v UTC of position reference 1min 00s C True heading 010 0 Charted depth O sow Enter sampling threshold for selected parameter Minimal distance between two points VII 4 3 TRACK COLOR FILTERS Color filters allow you to assign colors to scale values for each possible parameter of a track The colour of the track changes in the screen with the selected parameter TO ASSIGN THE TRACK TO THE COLOUR FILTER OF A PARAMETER YOU MUST HAVE PREVIOUSLY SAVED o THIS PARAMETER FOR THE TRACK TEMPLATE YOU ARE USING To configure a color filter 1 Inthe System menu click Settings Tracks and then Tracks Color Filters 2 Choose a parameter in the Parameter scrolling list 168 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x E L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual 3 For each line e Inthe To field enter a ending of the end limit of the range e Select the color that will represent the defined range 4 On
151. e and then enter a value in Maximum distance between ships ELP 4 Check Periodic Report 30s to generate an alarm each 30 seconds in case of inconsistent positions 5 Click OK IV 4 1 3 Inconsistent Depths Inconsistent depths allow to show when there is too much difference between an acquired depth and the depth that is computed with bathymetry and is relative to the position of the ship To do so you must enter an ELS Ecart limite de sonde Maximum difference between depths in meters or with a percentage If the value is specified in meters an alarm is generated when the difference between both depths is superior to this value if the value is specified in percentage an alarm is generated when the difference between both depths is superior or equal to in percentage the acquired depth The first time this occurs the following alarm is displayed Inconsistent depths difference x where x is the difference in meters or in percentage depending on the selected option between ship s and chart s depths If you have chosen to display this alarm each 30 seconds Periodic Report 30s check box the Inconsistent depths alarm is displayed the other times For example if the acquired value is 50 meters and the computed value is 55 meters the alarm is generated when there is an allowance of 10 the alarm is generated because the difference between both values 5 meters is exactly equal to 10 of the acquired value 50 meters 70 ISD
152. e is specified true heading has the same value as COW Example 345 000000 The drift that originates from the wind Example 1 697576 The speed of drift Example 2 00 kn This piece of information as well as Drift speed must be valid to modify the COG and leeway track s vector Example 020 0 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Depth dead reckoned software acquired Charted depth software Auxiliary information Height of tide dead reckoned software Submersion dead reckoned automatic Altitude dead reckoned automatic Swaying speed dead reckoned software Swaying course dead reckoned software Rate of turn acquired Rolling dead reckoned automatic Pitching dead reckoned automatic Depth below keel Draught dead reckoned automatic Air draught software Bridge height software Log distance on water software time acquired Log daily software time dead reckoned acquired Gecdis v8 User s Manual The distance between the seabed and the water surface Depth is dependent to Charted depth and Height of tide Depth Charted depth Height of tide Example 10 00 m The depth that corresponds to the chart datum level Example 7 0000000 m The difference between depth and charted depth originated by tide Example 3 000 m The depth of a submarine This piece of information is associated to the Depth b
153. e montortmg ssssssssessssssessrrrrrrsrrrrrtettrtttestnttrtsttttttentnntnennnttnner rnnr renn 163 VIES ve 164 VIES AUGO COMMON EE 164 VLS9 TNS ln WEE 166 VIN 3 10 Channelling AA 166 VILS AT Importing EXporting TOUTES E 167 NA TRIS cee aces tase soe E ee oe cee oe ccc se ge eee enns see eeeeecee gcuceeee 168 VOIR Stenting stopping a Wa CK E 168 WS ge le EEN 168 VII 4 3 Track Color fltere 168 VILAA Displaying the track oroile AAR 169 VII 4 5 Changing the track poropertes 170 VII S MARKS AND Ee 171 VIL51 Greating EE 171 VII 5 2 Configuring Mark Display Options ccccccccccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeeessaaeaeeeeeeees 173 NUN PRES rate cee cs cee ete eee eames neeeeetonaeaeetocuceseseaeeuleea 175 VIN CIRCEES E tel 177 VIG VC EEN 178 APPENDIX A GLOSSARY ccscceeceeseenecnseeneensecnecneeonscnsecnecessonscensoaesessonssessonssessonssensonees 179 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES APPENDIX B APPENDIX C APPENDIX D APPENDIX E ECDIS INFORMATION MANDATORY 0sccecsceeseceseeeneeeesesenseoeseeenseeneeoenesons 187 THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY CHART TI 188 EQUIPMENT CAN BE INTERFACED WITH GECDIS 2222222000000ssseseeeeeeeeeeeees 194 SNP OUTLINE ocena secant eneoveveguuincetbesvenent eravenbervoewnbenvavevbusye 204 sf dine alee este ets E E EEE TEE TA E T 206 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Ix A L LJ
154. e safely SCAMIN scale minimum The minimum scale after which an object mobile fleet etc is not displayed The object that is inserted by the user to which it is not possible to assign an alarm SENC System Electronic A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for Navigational Chart appropriate use updates to the ENC by appropriate means and other data added by the mariner It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other navigational functions and is the equivalent to an up to date paper chart The SENC may also contain information from other sources Shallow Contour The isobath that gives the limits of the areas that are not as deep as the other ones A part of the seabed in which depth is shallow compared with the surrounding points As this contour is shallow it is considered as dangerous for navigation Equal to Shallow waters SOG Speed Over The speed of the ship over the ground Ground Standard display The information that must be indicated when a chart is displayed for the first time The level of information provided by this display for route planning and verification can be modified by the navigator to match his or her needs SOW The speed over water This speed is relative to the surface of the sea 184 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The depth at which a sub
155. e selected display context has been updated to the current configuration of the software 3 Toclose the dialog box click Close gr DO NOT CONFUSE UPDATED WITH THE SELECTION OF A DISPLAY CONTEXT To delete a display context 1 Click View point to Display contexts and click Define 2 In the left list of the Display contexts dialog box select the display context you want to delete and click Delete 3 Toclose the dialog box click Close 62 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 i NZ el AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV MOBILES AND FLEETS IV 1 Navigation IV 1 1 MOBILES VECTORS A heading defines how the centre line of a ship is oriented compared with the geographical north It doesn t deal with drift notion a ship berthed has a course When the ship moves the heading becomes a course Course s value may be quite different from heading s Two elements may change the course of a ship wind and current Wind Ac D y Wind Ee i en Current To s Lagway track Leeway track ef Course make good d Drift Figure IV 1 Ship s Vectors Wind makes the ship drift and vary Wind drift is expressed with an angle i e leeway angle When added to true heading this angle is the angle of the route in relation to sea leeway track Course make good which is the movement of a ship in relation to the bottom of the water is the result of leeway track and the water that bears
156. ecide not to generate this alarm neither in the alarm bar nor in the black box To do so uncheck Periodic report 30 s in the Own Ship Specific Alarms dialog box When the danger is passed the following alarm is generated only in the black box Collision risk avoided with x CPA y TCPA z Where x is the dangerous mobile for the Own Ship y is the CPA and z is the TCPA between the Own Ship and the former dangerous mobile 3 i Own Ship Specific Alarms Target AIS Alarms SOVEN II a a ee E EEn ao Ea eC RES Ee A a ieee i v Enable i Minimum Distance to Pass DMP 1 00000 NM DMP Timeout TDMP 3min 00s i g ef Start target track on anticollision risk i P aiaiai ees Nonfakgerous DEE EEN It EE I o Enable gt a Maximum Distance between ships ELP Ji SE we Inconsistent Depth 5 g 3 Enable i i i 20 00 m 50 041N 1 arana oreo nace een nono nnn fon nen nncenncennnens Wd H f 0 00 5 EI f i i Dangerous AIS Periodic report 30s OK Cancel Apply i ooo os o0W ooo 02 soWw o00 00 00 000 02 S0E 10 15 49 B 50 04 158 N 000 04 322 W 08 13 37 Own Ship Collision risk with Fleet 01 Dangerous AIS CPA 641m TCPA 2min50s Yack DI Figure IV 8 Anti collision alarm ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 69 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To use anti collision 1 In the System menu click Setti
157. ect ECDIS representation if you want the vectors of your mobiles to follow the ECDIS standard representation e If you have selected ECDIS representation you will only be able to define the headline the SOG and SOW vectors as indicated in the ECDIS standard e If you haven t selected ECDIS representation You can also display the drift and swaying vectors A vector can t be displayed if the piece s of information defining it have not been added to a mobile These pieces of information are as follows Headline True Heading On Ground SOG COG On Water SOW COW Drift Drift speed Drift course Swaying Lateral soeed Lateral course 15 When finished configuring the default mobile appearance click OK IV 5 2 STANDARD REPRESENTATION Here is the standard representation of symbols without vectors and past track IV 5 2 1 Own Ship True scaled outline True scaled precise outline sample Secondary positioning true scaled precise outline sample 76 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 i L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ECDIS simplified symbol when the outline is too small ECDIS simplified symbol with heading and beam lines ECDIS Secondary positioning simplified symbol with heading and beam lines ECS simplified symbol when the outline is too small IV 5 2 2 AIS and ARPA Mobiles Some mobiles are different from the others by their appearance a
158. ect that represents a category this means that all objects of this category are displayed e LJ The object is not displayed If this cross appears in front of an object that represents a category this means that no object of this category is displayed RN If you check the All box all boxes will be checked which is the same thing as selecting the Full display Custom AAL O Select the information you want to display Base E Information about the Chart Display H Natural and Man made Features Port Features Standard H EI Depths Currents etc E Seabed Obstructions Pipelines Full H W Routes and Tracks H EI Special Areas Se Buoys and Beacon Lights Fog Signals Radar Se services and Small Craft Facilities H Cl Texts Save As H W Inland Presentation Close Hevert Figure V 34 Configuring ENC Chart Display To select a default display 1 Inthe Charts menu point to Chart Display and then click your desired level When you select one of the default display a checkmark appears in the menu in front of the selected level To set a customized display 1 In the Charts menu point to Chart Display and then click Custom Display The Custom Display dialog box opens In the tree the currently checked objects are those that are currently displayed on the chart 2 Add or remove types of objects displayed by checking or unchecking the boxes in front of their name You can first take a default display b
159. eeeeesees 101 deep COntouUr essssssssssessssrerssrrresssrrressreressreressreressrereeserres 180 deep Ee in elt 180 DENC default configuration sssseeessssrressereessreressrrresseerees 106 e e E A E E E EA PEEPS E EE ET EAS E T E T 85 depth below Keel 85 ale E 180 Display COMLEX EE 61 CW IU a e E E E E A anaes 61 deleng 62 SEI C CINE teen 61 DEELER 62 le 180 RE SIA OTE EA E prac EEEE EE E PET 85 dr ee ft e 84 IPI SIGE D 84 DYNAMIC feet 93 E Eege 140 206 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES E EE 181 elapsed time from ac 96 elapsed time from refrech 96 ENC E E gumentaasuecaneesaasaieonnuanerinerstarnn 181 database content 107 Export regulatie cenen ana a Ea iii F filtering Tale 97 DOCO E 97 NIE e E 97 EECHER tee 97 fixing the position Of a SNIP ccccccsssssececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 102 fleet el EE 93 SPECIFIC appearance seeeccccesssececceeseccecueeceesaueceessuenees 79 FS aah E EE EEE O E N EEE E se 93 AA AET e 93 CET 93 G Gecdis PMU e ME 4 Gecdis GS Call AUG DE 2 il Gel NEE 3 El 1 Gecdis ee CC 5 Geographic calculations cccccsssecceceeseeeeceeseeeeseeeeeeeseees 144 COS SY cass aan istcspscncessg N A eee eee 179 H MTSE eg el 85 information PSE IS CANS EE 95 Geet 94 CONE CLOUD ME 96 TICE TINE TAD ME 97 SEH 95 Information UCI MN EG 94 Information windows 13 44 ACCESS LO fun ele TEE 44 adding information
160. el and Pentium are registered trademarks and Celeron is a trademark of Intel Corporation Delph is a registered trademark of ELICS Warranty iXBlue provides a standard warranty of one 1 year covering this product against any defect in materials or manufacture The warranty starts from the date of shipment of the product from iXBlue s manufacturing premises to customer s location and its duration is indicated in the certificate of warranty delivered with the product In the event that a defect in materials or manufacture becomes obvious during the stipulated warranty period iXBlue will undertake at its sole discretion either to repair the defective product bearing the cost of all parts and labor or to replace it with an identical product In order to avail itself of this warranty Customer must notify iXBlue of the defect before expiry of the warranty period and take all steps necessary to enable iXBlue to proceed Customer shall be responsible for the packaging and the shipment of the defective product to the repair center notified by iXBlue the cost of such ii ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES shipment being borne by Customer iXBlue agrees to bear the cost of return freight based on CPT Cost Paid To Customer s airport location import tax free This warranty shall not be construed as covering defects malfunctions or damages caused by improper use or inadequate
161. elow keel piece of information Example 55 0000 m The vertical elevation of a point above the water level chart datum level Example 10000 0 m The SOG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile In other words this is the speed of a mobile on a virtual line perpendicular to it This piece of information is useful when berthing for example Example 01 334132 kn The COG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile Swaying course is computed from gyro Example 15 000000 The rate of turn is expressed in degrees per second Example 5 000000 e The rotational motion of a ship about the longitudinal axis Example 002 000000 The rotational motion of a ship about the transverse axis Example 001 000000 The depth between the seabed and the keel of the ship This piece of information is displayed if the Depth and Draught pieces of information have already been added So Depth below keel Depth Draught lf Submersion has been added then Depth below keel Depth Draught Submersion The distance that is measured between water level and the keel Example 5 000000 m The distance between the water level and the upper point of the ship For this piece of information to be computed draught must be added Example 8 0000000 m The difference between the Hp parameter in relation to the keel it can be configured clicking the mobile and then the Heights tab and draught So this piece of i
162. ement 2 Inthe dialog box that displays do one of the following e f you want to change the current database browse to your desired database select it and click Open e lf you want to add a new database click Create a database enter the name and click Create Folders can be compared to the drawers of a cabinet They contain all the user objects you create You can add a folder and change the current folder To add a folder 1 Inthe User Objects menu click Open Objects list 2 Click New Folder enter the new folder name and click OK To change the current folder 1 Inthe User Objects menu click Set Current Folder 2 Select a folder in the list of folders And click OK ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 153 x z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 2 Managing user objects VII 2 1 GENERAL OPERATION ON USER OBJECTS When you select a user object the Consultation window is displayed in the upper right part of the screen with information about the object you have selected Below this window buttons are displayed To hide a user object 1 Click the object you want to hide 2 Use the context sensitive button on the right of the screen and click Hide The object is now located with the other hidden objects To move a user object 1 Select the object to move and Use the mouse to select the object and click Move in the drop down menu To delete a user object 1 Doone of the
163. en the presentation library 1 Click Charts and then Chart1 After a few seconds a new program is launched ECDIS Chart x RM This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY A B ape Sse Sdtien zz 1 l SS l PA o NON ENC Data on Display Over scale part of a Display SE EE Eeer LEE EE ege i ENC DATA NON ENC DATA Figure V 35 The Presentation Library To skip to the next page click with the left button of your mouse After the last page you return to the first one To scroll the pages in reverse order right click 124 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 ix L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To display the meaning of a symbol place the mouse on the symbol i I Figure V 36 Tooltip information in Chart 1 V 2 12 4 Security options Security is an option allowing you to define different key depth levels There are four different depth levels shallow contour safety contour safety depth and deep contour These levels constitute four out of the five editable fields of the Security Options dialog box see below The other field safety height represents the secured height of the ship e g if it gets under a bridge It aims at defining alarms to inform the mariner Furthermore there are two different modes e A bicoloured mode or safe mode representation of the bathymetry with 2 colors o White
164. enath w haken Acquisition TimeOut mir UU 4 F Add Delete Gees Figure D 1 GEONET Trawl position configuration In addition certain information must be present or recommended Position port side necessarily software and required for proper operation e Position starboard necessarily software and required for proper operation Eccentricity necessarily software this information corresponds to the deviation from the ship s route e SOG necessarily software e COG necessarily software e Vertical spread estimated for a representation in the 3D view Normally the time stamp in the sentence is not present the information is then stamped with the UTC time GECDIS when decoding Do not forget to configure the trawl particularly ground cable length E S System Mobile Sizes I lt Trawl met olf Position fee EN Position port side L Length p ER Position starboard x 00 01 m Soccl W th d d OCH Ae d Re E i SEN G Ground cable length SO OO m SH EN SoG G L mt 9 Submersion Warp length adjustment 10 00 Add Delete Close Figure D 2 Trawl net sizes configuration On the other hand if the jumps are recorded on certain information must activate their filtering such as the geographical position in this case we must think also filter the horizontal spread 202 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Input Output amp Mobile Configuration 4
165. ence this product is subject to dual use goods export control procedures iXBlue can deliver this product freely to France or any other country of the European Union iXBlue can export this product under its own Community General Export Authorization EU 001 to the following countries Australia Canada USA Japan New Zealand Norway and Switzerland iXBlue can also export this product to other countries but only through the issuance of an individual export license by the French authorities Once in its country of first destination From a country member of European Union this product is free of movement travel as long as it remains within the European Union From a country member of European Union this product can only be re exported to a non European Union member country under the dual use goods export control procedures set forth by the national authorities From another country this product can only be re exported under both the conditions of the original export license from France depending on its type and content and the dual use goods export control procedures set forth by the national authorities If an individual export license has to be issued by the French authorities iXBlue requires you to provide as needed a description of your usual activity and the one of the end user if different and the end user to fill out an end user certificate which includes The description of the intended application of the product A commi
166. enu second part can be added when customizing the toolbar see 114 1 page 30 Clase ctrl F4 vw Chart in Full Screen Fiz Display Contexts Define Toolbar 1 Seaspert Blue default Figure II 22 Display contexts menu To create a display context 1 Define what window and views are present 2 Click View point to Display contexts and click Define Sea pert IxBlue default az EE Clase Figure III 23 Display contexts dialog box 3 On the Display Contexts dialog box click New Context and enter a name for the new display context in the Save current views configuration as field of the Save Configuration dialog box The current configuration of the software display context and display of windows is saved 4 If you further change the general display context of the software and you want to display this display context you just have to select it To select a display context you have already defined 1 Click View and point to Display contexts 2 A new menu opens If you have already defined display contexts the list of the display contexts is displayed in this menu Select your desired display context ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 61 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To update a display context 1 Click View point to Display Contexts and click Define 2 In the left list of the Display Contexts dialog box select the display context you want to update and click Update Th
167. er than you receive it Imagine that you receive data every 10 seconds If you enter 2 in the Calculation rate field your information will be regenerated every 2 seconds IF YOU HAVE SPECIFIED A CALCULATION RATE LOWER THAN THE REFRESHING OF YOUR DATA THE FOLLOWING BLINKING MESSAGE WILL BE LIABLE TO APPEAR CALCULATION WARNING Specific header Allows you to choose a specific header for the acquired sentences of the selected piece of information so that only sentences beginning with this header are taken into account For example imagine you acquire SOGGA and GPGGA sentences If you enter GPGGA on this zone you will only receive sentences beginning with this header Acquisition TimeOut Allows you to define a delay since last acquisition after which the piece of information will be considered as invalid If the timeout is 0 it will not be taken into account IV 6 5 2 Checking tab The Checking tab allows you to check the informational update When data is written in red this means that the piece of information is invalid undefined or does not exist ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 95 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Egg My GP52 as Source Checking Corrections Filtering ER Position E UTC of position freference 4 ER Position Ga sow 51 06 42518 N 00172306520 E Valid a ER True heading O5 07 2013 13 43 37 Acquistion TimeOut 30 08 Ge ER charted depth Elapsed Time From
168. er the different values in the five fields depending on your needs 4 Click OK You can go back to the default values clicking Default Values V 2 13 DANGER DETECTION OR ANTI GROUNDING The danger detection option also called anti grounding is used to detect dangers the ship may cross because they are located on its way This option is only available with the ENC chart module When a danger is detected on ship s run an alarm is generated This alarm is reproduced each time the danger is present in the anti grounding perimeter You can set anti grounding selecting a limit range or period of time and define an angular width to detect dangers e f you select a range danger detection is made in front of the ship according to the range e f you select a period the system computes how far from the Own Ship to detect dangers The maximum detection distance is 12 nautical miles and the maximum detection time is 30 minutes e Define a perimeter starting from the ship and defined by the angular width value ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 127 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES D x 3 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual 7 Ki F 1 S De a 1 ie e Ma Pe OO B i ee emp I Figure V 41 No danger detected Figure V 42 Dangers detected Depth areas 3 actions are required before using this option 1 Selecting the objects setting off alarms 2 Configuring the danger detection parameters 3 Activating the option To select the objects setting
169. er to turn the ship through planned voyage harbour to harbour e Hand steering e Trackpilot steering e Waypoint approach mode 1 6 4 1 Hand Steering Hand steering mode e Steering wheel 1 6 4 2 Trackpilot Steering Operator sets the required heading of the vessel Turn radius is also set by operator Turn is initiated by operator The navigation system displays required heading radius rate of turn and predicted turn 1 6 4 3 Waypoint Approach Mode e The system will follow the planned track to next waypoint e When reaching the next wheel over the system alerts operator e The system performs the turn at planned radius ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 23 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 6 5 MONITORING Monitoring is a continuous check of navigation data user actions and performances of the system Part of the monitoring is also the display of electronic sea chart and conning information Electronics sea charts Conning information Alarms Man over board Data logging 1 6 5 1 Display of electronic sea chart Own ship position Planned track Grounding alarm Chart information 1 6 5 2 Display of conning information Ship s heading Speed single or dual axis Rate of turn order and direction Depth Wind speed and direction Waypoint bearing Waypoint ETA Speed order Steering mode 1 6 5 3 Alarms Route monitoring Position calculation Pos
170. ere nae negascetaen 182 lege En 107 Chart loading modes cssssececcssececceeeececeeeeceesaeseeeesaees 114 Chart ee 59 charted GOL EE 85 CHECKING SENTENCES ccccccsseecccceeescecceeesceeseeeeeeseeeeceesseasees 92 RFC ll ierices aia 95 CKECKSUM cccccccsssecccceesececcaeseceeeeusceesauseceesauaeceesaeaseeesaegeses 91 Clearing TEE 142 CS UNS EEE E A E A N 143 El 142 e 143 Wiele 6 eared cesses cose TT 142 POLIO aa r 143 Gecdis v8 User s Manual E1 C sapped che a neal ee 63 84 Colour mode Change accconcavocsanespanvencnbaisaneduaavesssressand stavessavedsantauervessaveas 47 COMMIS UN ATION sensen anan ENAN ENER meeniaee ee 25 COWL Le a EE 86 adding and configuring esssessssseressreresrreresrreressreressne 86 eine Ege E 180 Configuration MISES AN GOUS CAIN sneer cercesneterccntavesciieattagansedeosienaiesmeantennads 37 users REENEN 33 configuring UOP S e LE 88 Configuring a COM port 86 configuring Information 94 configuring system Information 82 configuring TIME zone 82 CONNINE DOSILION EE 96 180 corrections DEN EEEE E A E EENE E E 96 CULO e Be e 180 Course MAKE good 63 TEE 180 Ee 63 84 RE 69 creating a TOCU cviwssvisntns esas wnnadeatatesasasWuesavenebisssasennedeasetesenneses 93 creating a e EE 93 EIERE 63 US ON eege 15 cusor Information 83 D Datum COT SU e BE 29 Veirel 182 er 185 Dead reckoning ccccsssecccccessececceeseceeceeeeceeseeeceesee
171. erence or if the installation does not start automatically double click on the exe file in the setup folder Select the language for installation An install wizard guides you through the steps of Gecdis installation a EE Als II Welcome to the SeaxXpert Setup Wizard This will install Seaxpert version 2 0 61 on your computer It is recommended that vou close all other applications before continuing Click Next bo continue or Cancel to exit Setup DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENS Cancel Figure 2 Setup Wizard ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Setup Seaapert f Preconfiguration Choice Choose one available preconfiguration for the program Select a preconfiguration Mode Seapix Mode Turbowin lt Back Cancel Figure I 3 Preconfiguration choice YOU CAN IF YOU WANT USE TURBO WIN MENUS AND SHORTCUTS TO DO SO CHECK THE OPTION TURBOWIN MODE IN THE WIZARD PRECONFIGURATION CHOICE PAGE HOWEVER WE DO NOT RECOMMEND USING THIS MODE INDEED IT HAS LIMITS RELATED TO GECDIS INTERACTION MODALITIES FOR THOSE WHO ARE USING TURBOWIN IT IS ONLY INTENDED TO HELP THEM USE GECDIS ERGONOMY SEE II 9 2 2 PAGE 41 FOR AN OVERVIEW OF THIS MODE 7 The CD ROM content is then copied into your hard disk and you can eject at the end of the procedure To uninstall Gecdis from your hard disk 1 Open Windows Control Panel 2 Selec
172. eveloped to adequately represent the surface of the earth on different continents at different locations Horizontal Datum Geodetic reference system of the panel Each panel is assigned a system in addition with Gecdis default geodetic system WGS84 To make both of them correspond you must configure Gecdis datum see The Datum Datum is unknown on several charts In such cases the following message is displayed in red in the upper centre part of the main view Warning Chart has no reference Navigate cautiously An error message will also be displayed in the Alarms window Depth Datum Arbitrary reference plane to which both heights of tides and water depths soundings are referenced on a chart Vertical Datum Chart datum level to which elevations and heights are referenced Depth Unit Some units are used depending on charts metres fathoms feet Height Unit fathoms fractions Fathoms Feet no depth V 3 3 2 Mariner s Notes ARCS charts include many notes that are located either landward or seaward When they are landward they take up more space than seaward where you can only see their name and the See note mention Each chart is assigned a list of mariner s note So when you change the current chart you also change the list Wherever you are in a chart it is possible to consult this list Please note that the name of the note on the chart might not be the same as the name of the note window This window will display
173. everal mobiles close the ones from the others by dragging the mouse in the main view To open the list of mobiles 1 Click Mobile and then List of Mobiles To hide a mobile 1 Open the list of mobiles 2 Inthe left hand pane select the category to which the mobile you want to hide belongs 3 Inthe right hand pane select your desired mobile 4 inthe menu bar click Hide ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 67 D AZ sr L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VM You can hide all the mobiles of a category selecting the category and clicking Hide To centre a mobile 1 Double click a mobile in the right hand pane The mobile is then centred on the main view Would it had been hidden it had become visible To sort out a column 1 On the right hand pane click the column header of the piece of information you want to sort out An up or down arrow indicates whether the column is sorted out in descending or ascending order 68 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES IVAN iarms IN ATI OWN SHIP SPECIFIC ALARMS IV 4 1 1 Anti collision Anti collision allows to compute how lucky the Own Ship is to strike other mobiles that belong to fleets and react from this Several notions are implied by anti collision e Allowed Closest Point of Approach Allowed CPA which is the minimum distance from which the capta
174. ew the outline of all cells available in chart databases ENC ARCS DNC BSB as well as the user objects and mobiles Each cell is symbolized with a frame As it is noted in the legend on the lower right part of the main view those frames are blue for ENC cells yellow for DNC and magenta for ARCS HH i Warning SH dangers gi l pm da ie rit JE vm DI i bet 1 LY E AT D ES In E De E As DU a r HI TT T i d re SE tered E E E Ke Ss LCE E SL RI Sa int TE i j IB K LL ECH e aiii E ei E a ER ET CL Fin i e AF wi d IO i _ _ _ D I gt ty eSP adai rqse 8 DI i J m e mn te bk Se Figure V 1 Chart coverage To display the chart coverage 1 Inthe Display menu select Charts menu Chart Informations and check Chart Coverage ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 103 D ix L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 1 2 LIST OF CHARTS A table lists all available charts in all chart databases ENC ARCS DNC Each chart is given information as follows The kind of chart ARCS ENC DNC The producer code The chart name The chart code The usage Harbour Coastal Approach Berthing and General The geographic coverage The issue date The update date The import date The list may be organized from any of those pieces of information except the chart code and the geogra
175. f the filters and display the profile of this filter ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 169 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 4 4 4 The graph This graph gives you the profile of the parameter for your desired distance When you drag the cursor on one of the points represented in this graph the location to which this location refers in the main view is displayed VII 4 5 CHANGING THE TRACK PROPERTIES Whenever you want you can modify the track s visual representation To change properties of a track 1 Select a track and click the Properties context sensitive button 2 Inthe Track Properties dialog box change if you want the line and color and the maximum number of points to display 3 When you choose a colour this colour is displayed for the half segment of the current track the current segment is the line that starts at the last point recorded in the track Vil 4 5 1 Name Name of the tracked mobile and the date of creation of the track VIl 4 5 2 Line Type of line for the track There are 8 types of lines available VII 4 5 3 Color Colour of the track This color is applied only if no track colour filter has been assigned to it gr IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOUR SEE 1 4 2 PAGE 17 VII 4 5 4 Display at most The maximum number of points for the track The track stops if this maximum number is reached 170 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2
176. field doesn t change whereas the value of the Scale field may change if you zoom in or out on the chart Chart datum level to which elevations and heights are referenced An arbitrary reference plan to which heights of tide and depths are referenced ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 LA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES sharts V 3 1 ARCS OVERVIEW V 3 1 1 Introduction ARCS Admiralty Raster Chart Service charts have been developed by the UKHO United Kingdom Hydrographic Office to provide digitized nautical charts with notice to mariners updates IXBLUE offers the ARCS Navigator licence type Two kinds of CD ROMs allow you to manage ARCS charts e Chart CD ROM There are 11 CD ROMs that gather the whole world charts Over 2800 charts provide coverage of the world s commercial shipping routes main ports and harbours at a wide range of scales e Anupdate CD ROM that contains all updates managed by the UKHO These updates are cumulative i e every week a new CD ROM is produced with new updates from the past week At regular intervals the chart CD ROMs are brought up to date with updates resulting in a new edition ARCS Navigator is fully compatible with a wide range of Electronic Chart Systems ECS and Electronic Chart Display amp Information Systems ECDIS V 3 1 2 Registering ARCS Charts When buying Gecdis with ARCS option IXBLUE sends you a user permit made
177. formation 01072013 15 12 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 830 N 001 25 394 E lt Wiased gt Vali AN warning Yes O1f07 2013 15 11 06 01 07 2013 15 11 11 40022 IXMIoMobile Gwn ship Inconsistent position with isBlue difference 4 996 NM Information No OLforf20135 15 11 05 loon System Administrator is lagged on 2 Information Yes 01 07 2013 15 11 04 01 07 2013 15 11 11 Mode IxMRoutes Track kee Autopilot in manual mode Information No Olforfe013 15 11 02 strt System Seaxpert was started 2 information No 28 06 2013 16 31 10 stop System Seaspert was stopped Information No 28 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 294 N 001 25 394 E lt Wise4 gt vali Ku Warripg Yer FRAN tne EI YTFo Thou tee Dote Mo YTF evceeded YTF 100 4m Blue DR 50 59 830 N 001 25 394 E lt WiGse4 gt Valid Heading 000 0 Valid SO W 1 0 kn Dad ETE Base Standard A Filter Figure Ill 16 The Black Box Above this window the table gathers all error messages and characteristics as follows Administrator User Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Ardminiskraknr 1 Sj L 1 amp e Type the type of the message Information Warning or Error e Alarm specifies whether the message is an alarm e Date the date of the event This is the default sort
178. gain the ARCS module ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 131 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Chart Permits Hence Ipe Licence and permits hese peers eg altered or not available Load the original media Licensee Vessel Name Host System Name Fixed Site Close Gecdis v8 User s Manual Figure V 47 Chart Permit Installation Dialog Box Before Being Installed To launch the ARCS module for the first time 1 Launch Gecdis and do one of the following e If SoArcs is the default chart module skip to the following step e lf SoArcs is not the default chart module once you have launched Gecdis click the Charts menu point to Modules and click ARCS Charts 2 An explorer window is displayed This explorer asks you where you want to load ARCS charts Give a location in the tree e g Gecdis root folder Once selected the location an ARCS folder is created to gather all your data IF YOU WISH TO CONNECT TO AN EXISTING DATABASE THROUGH A NETWORK PLEASE CHECK THAT THE TELL YOU WHETHER THE FOLDER IS CORRECT OR NOT Click OK Se SHARED FOLDER IS AN ARCS S UPPER LEVEL FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE IF ARCS FOLDER IS A GECDIS SUBFOLDER YOU WILL HAVE TO SHARE GECDIS FOLDER AND SELECT ARCS A WARNING MESSAGE WILL 4 The Chart Permits dialog box is displayed The fields of this dialog box are empty and a message that tells you the permits need to be installed is blinking Click the Install permits
179. ground Normaly the background is black default configuration Overview of Colour modes Colour mode Result Day with white background default Day with black background Dusk with black background default Dusk with white background Night with always black background 11 1 3 MOTION CONTROL Motion control manages how the main view to follow a mobile Own Ship or any mobile You should know that the motion control has two modes true and relative motion See III 4 3 1 page 52 for more information on these modes In true motion mode a control area depending on the surface of the view is used to confine the ship inside In addition to these modes you can adjust motion control placement mode e The centered mode uses the center of the view to manage the motion control In this case you can adjust the surface of the control area from 50 to 90 e The anticipated mode uses the course and speed over ground to determine the ideal placement of the view to see as much as possible to the trajectory of vessel In this case the surface of the control area is fixed to 50 26 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 d A L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES OSOON e E E ene aes EE SE Warning You didn tchooselto detect a ining You didn t 001 36 00E 001 36 S0E 001 S7 00E NTO eas Figure II 3 True motion control centered mode area to 70 0 S S0E In the Motion Control topic you can set the
180. he Delete User button lt gt IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DELETE THE ADMINISTRATOR USER 11 6 2 CONFIGURING USERS RIGHTS Almost every command of the software is assigned to access rights This configuration only concerns Captain Navigator and Guest groups the Administrator group can use all the commands without any limitation If a user is not allowed to use a command he will not be able to open the corresponding dialog box tab etc OO OO SS Go M N ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 33 Q A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Check in group columns the level from which the right is granted to the user Right Captains Navigators Guests Select windows layout x x A _ This command is allowed for all users Datum selection A Consultation get description of chart features user objects mobiles etc x x Captains Navigators and Change color mode x x TTT Administrators can use this command Resize and move docked windows A Edit places catalogue x Acknolegde alarms x x Ee RA TETE and Own Ship characteristics 5 EEN E amp i put T Set mobile dead reckoning x except Administrator Configure mobile appearance x Display Hide mobiles x x Captains and Administrators can use Delete dynamic mobiles x fie ebe Configure information pages and bars x OK Cancel Figure II 10 Configuring Access Rights To configure access rights 1 Inthe Configuration dialog box click the Users tab
181. he main view When a user object is hidden it is displayed in grey If you double click a hidden user object it becomes visible and the main view is centred on it e Delete Deletes the selected user object When a user objects is deleted it is located on the Deleted Objects folder e Move Objects Allows you to change the folder of the selected user object e Export Allows exporting a user object to a database e Restore Restores the selected object to its original folder 154 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 KA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Clean Delete permanently the selected object VII 2 3 CONFIGURING THE FILTERS Gecdis allows you to define filters for user objects e Filter 1 to sort out objects by date campaign Position e Filter 2 to sort out objects according to their object visual features Symbol colour etc Therefore you can gather several types of parameters in one filter and you can choose which one you want to display on the screen You can thus display objects having close similarities User Objects Filter From 19 04 2012 00 00 00 To 20 04 2012 00 00 00 Annual period Apply Position Centre 43 32 51463N 007 23 74841E Range T Apply Figure VII 2 User object filter window To configure the filters 1 Inthe User Objects menu click Define objects filter VII 2 4 IMPORTING USER OBJECTS When importing an object to
182. hip s outline refer to Appendix E page 204 that describes the fields parameters to enter in order to create an outline Sizes Heights Navigation 30 Model AIS gel L length 150 9 m Outline Filename l B beam 29 00 m ECDIS outline L I Conning position Prvoting position T Lp 58m Lp 115 8 m po Bp 0 0000 m Bp 0 0000 m More Close Figure IV 4 Own Ship s sizes L Length Represents the total length of your ship B Beam Represents the total beam of your ship Conning Position This position is the reference position of the Own Ship and not necessarily the reference position of the positioning system The difference between both must be specified in the Corrections tab of the Position piece of information see IV 6 5 page 94 Lp Defines the distance between the rear of the ship and the conning Bp Defines the distance between the axis of the ship and the conning ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 65 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Pivoting Position The pivoting position defines the position in which the ship will pivot Lp The distance between the rear of the ship and the pivoting position Bp The distance between the axis of the ship and the pivoting position used in dead reckoning mode IV 2 2 HEIGHTS The Heights tab allows you to configure the height of the ship and its draught Own Ship Characteristics o Sizes Heights Navigation 30 Model AIS T Total height
183. his type of route does not require specific settings you just have to click OK to close the dialog box and create the SAR diagram ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 149 x z3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES SAR diagram x Search conditions visibility 3 000 wu Search object ManOverBoard 1 00 nm General properties h Draw SAR diagram Initial position 48 40 37 1 18N 004 S52 09 7 10 S i Initial course 026 5 Radius R width 10 00000 nm Spacing 5 Diagram type Parallel Square spiral Length L 5 0000 pm Vessel count Parallel Vessel number Figure VI 15 Sector Configuration The fist line is generally run head wind its length is 2R Each turn is equal to 120 to starboard First line 120 s e Ki ra e ty 5 A d Aa Jg a y i wl e d Sp wn r R j l F Na d 44 Age KN F e ra a ff e r Se af ss e la Figure VI 16 A Sector To create a sector type SAR diagram 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Create SAR Diagram 2 If not already done check the Draw SAR Diagram box and then fill the General properties and Search conditions fields 3 In Diagram type click Sector 4 Click OK The diagram is displayed in the main view VI 5 4 PARALLEL ROUTE Parallel route is recommended when two or more ships take part in the search o
184. ic mode Realtime Print Input Output Summary Software SeaXpert version 40 0 4 0 Processor Intel R Core TM 2 Duo CPU T7250 2 00GHz Operating System Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 DirectX version 9 4 09 00 0904 Physical memory 512 MB Number of serial ports 1 Computer name b_winxp IP Addresses 1010 215 Taking account elapsed time between two No runnings Periodic mobile backup Yes Limit information updates to every second Yes Automatically update Windows time No UTC Information can not go back in time No Serial Port Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Default Datum COM1 GPS 4800 No parity E 1 WGS84 UDP Stream Port IP Output Input filter Default Datum NET1 UDP 1001 1001 WGS84 TCP Stream Port Server Address State Default Datum TCP1 SSServeur 1001 192 168 16 53 Client WGS84 Figure IV 44 Input Output summary in Advanced mode Basic and advanced mode windows are similar They consist of three parts e The system general characteristics configuration of streams system information e All mobiles and their specific pieces of information Own Ship pieces of information are displayed first and they are highlighted in yellow e Fleets IV 6 7 2 Displaying Real Time Information Real time information allows to reproduce in the summary window the changes you ve made into the Input Output amp Mobiles Configuration dialog box as soon as they are performed and the changes of values provoked by acquisiti
185. ile navigation tools special views etc Unlike the cartographic modules Gecdis can load as much as the license allows Some are dependent on the other such as Route module does not load if the User module does not The vast majority of Gecdis menus are built entirely by these modules KR The About window Gecdis allows you to check the number of modules used by clicking in the window and using the mouse wheel ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 19 LA L_ LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES What to Do Before Departure The following describes some operations you should do before your departure and where you could find information about them in this manual 1 5 1 CUSTOMIZING 1 5 1 1 Configuring your screen size Configuring your screen size is a very important step If it is not correctly configured objects of the main view may be disproportionate See II 1 1 page 25 to configure your screen size 1 5 1 2 Customizing Gecdis screen You can customize some parts of the Gecdis screen For example you can optimize the placement of the various windows that you need define what own ship informations and in what order you want to view or select the commands you use most often See ll A4 page 30 to configure the toolbar See II 9 page 39 to configure windows informations See Ill 7 page 61 for more information about Gecdis customisation 1 5 2 CHECKING 1 5 2 1 Datum You must check
186. implemented in any convenient form which produces the same results as the presentation library Quality of Data An area within which a uniform assessment of the quality of the data exists Rate of Rotation The velocity to rotate for a mobile Recommended Speed The speed that is recommended to reach the next wheel over according to the ETA Information is computed according to ship s position and ETA Reference position The last real position value that is updated when the position changes except if changed by a position control Reference Speed The speed that is taken as a reference to define the way a mobile appears in the main view If it is inferior to the mobile speed the mobile will be in early mode and will be located below the main view Otherwise it will be centred and controlled on the main view Registration Identification marks that any ship should bear externally and visibly ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 183 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The regional ENC Coordinating Centre as defined by IHO ENC distributor Most ENC information will not be supplied directly from a Hydrographic Office to an ECDIS Regional ENC Coordinating Centres RENCs will operate as central distribution nodes compliant with the IHO WEND model receiving data from HOs and supplying distributors agents and ECDIS users RENC A RENC must be able to authenticate ENC data sets provided by
187. in lets the officer of the watch pass from a ship if sea traffic or proximity of dangers makes it impossible to operate to respect the Allowed CPA the officer of the watch gives notice of it to the captain e Minimum Time to Closest Point Minimum TCPA which is a user defined duration to specify the Minimum TCPA to reach the Allowed CPA e CPA and TCPA between the Own Ship and the other mobiles computed from the real time navigation parameters For a collision risk to occur the following things must be gathered e CPA between the dangerous mobile and the Own Ship is inferior to the Allowed CPA e TCPA is a positive value if TCPA is negative there is no more collision risk TCPA is inferior to the Minimum TCPA For example if Allowed CPA is 5 nm and Minimum TCPA is 15 minutes the mobile of a fleet will be considered as dangerous if TCPA between it and the Own Ship ranges from 0 to 15 minutes before reaching a 5 nm radius around the Own Ship On screen a circle is drawn around the Own Ship to symbolise to the Allowed CPA with a red colour in Non ECDIS mode and an orange colour in ECDIS mode When a mobile is dangerous it is surrounded by a red and blinking triangle that points at the top The following alarm is displayed first and then each 30 seconds in the alarm bar Collision risk with x CPA y TCPA z where x is the dangerous mobile y is the CPA and z is the TCPA between the Own Ship and the dangerous mobile You can d
188. ine depths box to highlight the mark depth if displayed in the main view e Check the Hide symbol if a comment is set box if you want to hide the mark symbol for which you have indicated a depth 4 Check the Use large mark symbols box if you want to display symbols with double size n the ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 173 xXxSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES cartographic views gr IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOUR SEE LA 2 PAGE 17 174 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 ix L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 6 Areas An area is a polygon the user can add to symbolise and highlight on the screen a part of the chart that is remarkable or dangerous Each area can be associated to several characteristics e ltcan be closed or opened e tcan have a specific visual representation line and or symbol e Furthermore it is possible to configure the area so that an alarm is generated when one or several mobiles ARPA targets for example defined by the user enters or quits this area 07 51 00 0 Zone Alarm TAQUEY entered in Circle Figure VII 25 Area alarm These alarms are e Mobile is in the area if the mobile enters the area e Mobile is out of the area if the mobile leaves the area To create an area 1 Click User Objects and then Create Area drag the mouse in the main view clicking each time you want to define
189. iners that has been inserted in the panel If O is displayed in this field this means that no notice to mariners has been found in the current panel Latest Correction Issue The date when the latest notice to mariners has been edited If 00 00 00 is Date displayed in this field this means that the chart hasn t been updated since the last edition of the chart CDs Display Information Projection e SE Scale 325000 Fotation 0 00 Ellipsoid Name REFERENCE ELLIPSOID 1980 Horizontal Datum European 1989 ETRS89 Depth Datum Approx Lowest AstronomicalTide Vertical Datum Mean High Water Springs Depth Unit Metres Height Unit D EE Figure V 57 General Information on ARCS Charts 2 Projection Any systematic arrangement of Meridians and Parallels portraying the curved surface of the sphere of spheroid upon a plane Each panel is assigned a projection Projections are as follows e Mercator e Polar Stereographic e Transverse Mercator Scale The scale of the panel that is currently displayed on the screen A specific scale is assigned to each panel depending on information and details to be displayed Rotation Rotation of the panel if north in the chart is not oriented to the upper part of the screen This value makes it possible to display the north arrow in the same direction as north in the chart Ellipsoid Name Smooth mathematical representation of the geoid Many reference ellipsoids have been d
190. ing messages are the first messages to be removed error messages are the second ones and information message are the last ones To check all alarms at the same time 1 Click the window that displays the last alarm 2 And then on Check All Alarms button 11 5 2 THE BLACK Box 1 5 2 1 Overview The black box is a database that stores all alarms and other events for informative use As it offers a history of the software use it will mainly be used to analyze its behaviour if a problem occurs ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 39 X 3 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Z Black Box 284 69749 Type D Date Receipt Date Id Source Title Text Information Mo 01 07 2013 15 18 00 40008 IXMIoMoabile wn Ship Blue DR 50 59 929 N 001 25 394 E Wigs gt vali 2 Information Mo 0107 2013 15 17 00 40008 IXMIoMoabile Dwn Ship Blue DR 50 59 912 N 001 25 394 E lt Was584 gt Vali Information No 0107 2013 15 16 00 40008 IXMIoMabile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 896 N 001 25 394 E lt Wiesb4 gt vali 2 Information No 0107 2013 15 15 00 40008 IXMIoMoabile Dwn Ship Blue DR 50 59 860 W 001 25 394 E lt Was584 gt Vali Information No 0107 2013 15 14 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 G63 N 001 25 394 E lt Wiose4 gt Vali 2 Information No 01 07 2013 15 13 00 40008 IXMIoMoabile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 847 M 001 25 S94 E lt WiGsed gt Vali In
191. int into the last point e DECK different vectors defining the ship s deck The limit is set to 50 points Be sure the shape is closed by repeating the first point into the last point You don t need to define the points for the deck but the key word DECK must be written e END end of the source file Be sure you haven t forgotten this key word since it is used to delimit the DECK see below an example of the file The drawing is the representation of the values given in the file 204 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 l gt L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual REM Nom du navire Unit metre fathom foot metre REM X Y Sensor one 0 0 0 0 Stern rear track 0 0 121 6 Depth sensor position 0 0 0 0 Point for event mark 0 0 0 0 HULL 100 pts maxi 1 0 0 40 2 2 3 7 39 0 3 346 37 7 4 9 3 31 4 5 11 6 253 1 6 13 0 18 8 7 13 0 0 0 8 1320 Tle 9 11 8 118 7 10 10 5 120 6 11 5 9 120 6 12 5 0 121 6 13 0 0 121 6 14 5 0 121 6 15 5 9 120 6 16 10 5 120 6 17 11 8 118 7 18 13 0 113 1 19 413 20 0 0 Axe X 20 13 0 18 9 21 11 6 2539 nunusononunnununnnununnununa G G panacea eens e eee eee ee gt 22 9 3 31 4 23 5 6 37 7 24 3 7 39 0 25 0 0 40 2 DECK 50 pts maxi 1 0 0 Taa 2 SL 7 3 3 6 2 4 5 4 14 9 4 5 5 14 9 0 4 6 8 7 0 4
192. ional display area of the chart presentation for route monitoring shall be at least 270 mm x 2 0 mm e For ECDIS back up arrangements the effective size of the chart presentation shall be not less than 250 mm x 250 mm or 250 mm diameter e Operational display equipment including multifunction displays for example conning displays shall provide a minimum screen resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels or equivalent for a different aspect ratio except where permitted or not required by the IMO or when used for a single specific purpose for example speed log echo sounder e Display equipment intended to support the presentation of electronic chart information shall provide a maximum pixel pitch of 0 29 mm m of nominal viewing distance 1 min of arc for example 0 36 mm at 1 237 mm viewing distance ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 1 LS lt LU Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 1 2 INSTALLATION UNINSTALLATION AutoPlay Menu XSLUE INTEGRATED SOLUTIONS Install SeaXpert 1 2 5 Manual Contact ts Figure I 1 CD ROM AutoPlay Menu To install Gecdis into your hard disk J 2 GN Connect the HASP key on the USB port of your machine If Windows asks you to install a new device cancel the procedure the pilot of the dongle will be installed with the installation of Gecdis Insert iXBlue s CD ROM into the appropriate drive Select the first line of the autoplay menu with product name ref
193. is made in a table that is displayed in the Input Output Summary window This window reacts in the same way as a secondary window You can dock it in a specific location of the screen move it or resize it Likewise the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box the display of the summary is made e In basic mode the main parameters of system information ships and fleets are displayed e n advanced mode all configured parameters are displayed The colour of a piece of information expresses its status e Red if invalid or undefined e Black or white depending on the background if valid or of normal quality e Blue if of high quality The first column lists all information that relates to each object The other ones give information about them e Value indicates the value of the piece of information e Source tells the origin of the piece of information In case of dead reckoning or computation either Estimate or Software are displayed If the piece of information is acquired the source of acquisition 98 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Ds L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES is displayed e Stream allows to know on what stream the piece of information is connected The name of the sensor is given into brackets This name may have been filled in when configuring the stream Comment field e Calc rate specifies the rate a piece of information is calculated Z Input Output Summary Bas
194. ition monitoring Waypoint approach Sensor failure System failure Incorrect operator action Unsafe water areas 1 6 5 4 Man over board e Built in function for man over board 1 6 5 5 Data Logging e History book e Voyage recording 24 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES Il GENERAL CONFIGURATION Tae re d wm Wm em em Fut F d d J j Q WI El Y Zia m lew hy H Ga Y sw Di The Display tab allows you to configure the main display properties colour modes motion control and screen size To access the Display tab 1 Inthe System menu click Settings and General configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Display tab Security Miscellaneous User InterFace Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms Motion Control Screen size Automatic off centenng depending on DISPLAY MAIN course over ground Size ZdUmm v 203mm Centered true motion area ratio 75 e DPI 96 x 96 1024 763 ECDIS Calibrated display None e i l Automatic multi monitor Display ID IO 2841 0 Fixed size Width mm 474 COM Pott Height mm 295 Baud rate Non ECDIS Colour Modes Parity None Black background in day mode Stop Bits 1 White background in dusk mode OK Cancel Figure Il 1 Configuring the Display Tab 11 1 1 SCREEN SIZE IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONFIGURE THE EXACT DIMENSIONS OF YOUR SCREEN IF YOU DO NOT v CONFIGURE T
195. justment conning pas E On the length L 15 0000 m On the beam EI 0000 m E True heading On the value S S Ge EE value sensors O0 O0 00000N OO0 O0 OO000 St Charte dept o Zb iBlue s Add Delete Close Apply Figure IV 40 Applying Corrections to a Piece of Information To apply corrections to the depth piece of information 1 Access the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box clicking Mobile Configuration and then Corrections 2 On the On the length L and On the beam B fields of the Positioning adjustment conning pos zone enter the length and beam differences between your sounder and the conning position 3 In the first field of the On the value zone enter the slope ratio to correct the value if a continuous drift of the sensor occurs In the second field enter a value for the offset of the sensor e g the difference between the water and the sensor for a sounder 96 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 4 Click Apply If you apply a correction to the position of your ship as indicated in the above dialog box a blinking point is inserted in ECS mode not in ECDIS This point represents the position of the antenna see below Figure IV 41 Ship with a corrected position IV 6 5 4 Filtering tab The Filtering tab is used to reject some acquired values if they go beyond defined thresholds ER Position a
196. kn 055 3 Water vector 18 0 kn 055 3 True heading 055a Depth 5 00 m Figure 1 19 Information pages 1 3 1 7 Secondary windows Secondary windows General view Channel view Pilot View etc correspond to a specific use of Gecdis Their common characteristics are as follows e They can be displayed from the View menu except the consultation window which is displayed after selecting an object in the main view e By default they are docked most of the time i e they are fixed in a location of the screen that has been previously defined They can be moved outside the area then they are in floating mode and it is possible to resize them You can also locate several views side by side or one above the other In the latter case the first view is displayed above the second one e They can be part of a display context A display context is a configuration of the screen layout that contains amongst other things windows that have been previously selected by the user You can save this configuration to use and display it later see Ill 7 page 61 1 3 1 7 1 Consultation windows When selecting an object in geographic view a window is displayed on the right of the screen by default Above the selected object is described In the lower part of the window are buttons to perform different actions can be based on the selected object Position conning 51105765 M 001933 216 E Ground vector 18 0 kn 275 99 So
197. lable the Initial course field is filled with the corresponding field e The R radius of the route The radius differs according to the type of diagram The spacing S is automatically computed according to values that are selected for Visibility and Search object The spacing S i e the distance between each line will be all the wider as the visibility is better and the search object huge So a 3 nm visibility and a searched man overboard implies a 0 4 nm spacing S On the contrary a 20 nm visibility for a 24 m searched ship implies a 18 1 nm spacing S To open the dialog box allowing to configure SAR diagrams 1 Click the Navigation menu and click Create SAR Diagram IS POSSIBLE TO PREPARE A DIAGRAM ON ONE MACHINE WHILE WORKING ON ANOTHER DIAGRAM ON X WHEN WORKING IN A NETWORK SAR DIAGRAMS ARE NOT REPRODUCED IN DIFFERENT MACHINES SO IT ANOTHER MACHINE VI 5 2 SQUARE SPIRAL ROUTE Square spiral route is normally used for a single ship if the wind drift is low Spiral is drawn in a square each side of which is equal to twice the specified radius in the dialog box When you select this type of route the Spacing S can now be editable This field allows you to enter the length of the two first lines The size of the two following lines will be 2S the two after will be 3S and so on For example if the spacing value is 1 nm the two first lines will measure 1 nm the two following lines 2 nm the two after 3 nm and so on adding 1 each ti
198. lag has been added Local time is the sum of the UTC and time lag A letter is specified next local time This letter allows to reference the time lag For example if the selected time zone is GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris the letter will be B in summer and A in winter A 1h B 2h N 1h O 2h etc Cursor position Software The position of the cursor when dragged over the main view or the chart overview If over a dialog box or outside the main view the position of the centre of the screen is specified Bearing Own Ship Cursor The bearing between the Own Ship and the cursor in relation to the Software geographical north This piece of information is invalid if the pieces of information of the Own Ship and the cursor are invalid as well Distance Own Ship Cursor The distance between the Own Ship and the location of the cursor Software This piece of information is invalid if Own Ship s and cursors positional information are invalid as well TTG Own Ship Cursor Software The Time to go Describes the time the Own Ship would take on the same speed as the current one to reach the position of the cursor This piece of information is invalid if Own Ship s and cursors positional pieces of information and Own Ship s leeway track and course make good are invalid as well Height of tide Cursor Dead The height of the water level on cursor s position ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 83 Q D
199. lect the name of the user you want to log on Enter password in the Password field Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply o1 AOON 34 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual I 7 Danger detection The danger detection or anti grounding option enables to detect any danger the ship may encounter when following its route When the ship encounters an object considered as dangerous an alarm is generated to inform the mariner Currently only user objects and those of ENC chart can be detected To do this you must first select one of these objects will be those dangerous For this see V 2 13 on page 127 to select ENC objects Two forms of detection are possible e A guard sector defined by an angle and a distance limit Figure Il 12 Guard sector e A security polygon defined by safety distance and a distance limit Figure II 13 Security polygon The distance limit in both cases may be defined by e Simply by a distance value e By atime which is automatically converted by a distance depending on the speed of the Own Ship in real time To configure danger detection Click System Settings General Configuration and then the Security tab Check radio button corresponding to maximum distance or time to danger Input the maximum distance or time Check Use Guard Sector if you want a guard sector otherwise a security polygon is used Input the
200. lected user object 1 3 1 9 Dialog boxes A dialog box is a specific area of the screen that is displayed after a user s action when the user gives an order to the software that requires further information or to make choices between several options before running There are two kinds of dialog boxes e Modal dialog boxes e g System Setting General configuration this kind of dialog box requires that the user gives the adequate information before he can continue to work e Modeless dialog boxes e g Mobile Own Ship Dead Reckoning this kind of dialog box is left open as long as the user doesn t close it it can then be used several times for different purposes because the user can work while this dialog box is open 1 3 2 THE CURSOR In main view the cursor appears in different forms and reflects a current action ECS ECDIS mode mode Default mode center with left click and consultation with right click Chart consultation mode by pressing the Ctrl key o Object move in progress ai Geographic scrolling in any direction by pressing the left mouse button po Geographic scrolling to the east when the cursor is near the edge of the view ER Geographic scrolling to the north when the cursor is near the edge of the view ER Geographic scrolling to the north east when the cursor is near the edge of the view e Geographic scrolling to the north west when the cursor is near the edge of the view Geographic
201. les to follow or not the ECDIS standard representation e If you have checked ECDIS representation the past track will be represented in black e If you haven t checked ECDIS representation the past track will be represented in grey Configure the Duration min field to indicate the time represented in the past track and Time tag rate min field to indicate the interval between two time tags If you check the Long time tags box hour minutes are displayed for each tag whereas if you uncheck this box only minutes are displayed In the above dialog box the past track will have a new tag each minute during 15 minutes The time will be indicated with minutes and hours Click the Vectors tab and check the Visible box depending on whether you want to display or not the vectors and the headline ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 19 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Track Symbol Label Past track Vectors Miscellaneous wv Mile SCAMIM ECDIS representation 1000000 Duration min 6 vw Head line vw On ground vw Drift vw Turn Ind vw On water Dwauimg wv Path predictor OK Cancel Apply Figure IV 16 Configuring the Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Vectors 13 The Duration min field allows you to define the period in minutes during which the vectors will be represented e If you haven t checked Visible you won t be able to see the vectors of your mobile e If you have checked Visible 14 Sel
202. maintenance of the product Under no circumstances shall iXBlue be due to provide repair or replacement under this warranty in order a to repair damage caused by work done by any person not representing iXBlue for the installation repair or maintenance of the product b to repair damage caused by improper use or connection to incompatible equipment and specifically the opening of the housing of the equipment under warranty shall cause the warranty to be automatically cancelled c to maintain any product that has been modified or integrated into a larger configuration if such modification or integration increases the duration or difficulty of the maintenance of said product This warranty covers the product hereunder and is provided by iXBlue in place of all and any other warranty whether expressed or implied iXBlue does not guarantee the suitability of the product under warranty for sale or any specific use iXBlue s liability is limited to the repair or replacement of defective products this being the sole remedy open to Customer in the event the warranty becomes applicable iXBlue cannot be held liable for indirect special subsequent or consequential damage irrespective of whether iXBlue has or has not received prior notification of the risk of occurrence of such damage Export Regulation This product is classified as a dual use good it has been developed for non military use but could be used for military applications As a consequ
203. marine is located Swaying course The COG projected by the perpendicular line of the mobile and computed from the gyro Swaying Speed The SOG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile In other words this is the speed the ship moves on a virtual line that would be perpendicular to the ship This piece of information is useful when docking TCP Stream The protocol that allows to connect a transmitter to a receiver TCPA Time to closest The time to the closest approaching point between two objects This time point of approach defines the moment when two objects will be the closest the one from the other Tidal Amplitude The vertical distance indicated with positive values between the sea surface and charted depth Tidal Curve A graph that represents variations of sea level depending on time at a specific location In normal conditions the curve should look like a sinusoid Tidal Stream In a tidal wave the horizontal motion the speed of the particles of water Tide Gauge The device that allows to notice at any time the tidal amplitude The difference between the current time onboard and the UTC time TLL Target latitude and The sentence that acquires latitude and longitude of a target target number longitude name position and the time marker that is used in target tracking systems True Motion abbreviation The heading relative to geographical north which is the angle resulting from the crossing of
204. maritime zones above 0 o Blue zones between 0 and safety contour In that mode the following values are equal shallow contour safety contour deep contour e A four colour mode or unsafe mode representation of the bathymetry with 4 colors White the maritime zones above 0 foreshore Medium blue the zone between 0 and shallow contour Light blue the zone between shallow contour and safety contour Pale blue the zone between safety contour and deep contour O O O e Safety contour Contour above which the ship cannot navigate safely This value is fixed by the navigator according to the characteristics of the ship The line appears in black and its width is superior to the other ones If the value the navigator has entered doesn t correspond to any available contour the safety contour will be the first deeper contour The value depends on the ship s features On the other hand the display of the line depends on the available safety contours Security Options Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Raising Alarms ie 3 E Safety height 30 m Safe mode C Unsafe mode Shallow contour Safety depth 30 Safety contour 30 ar Peer Deep contour Default Values e lz Si Figure V 37 Security Options dialog e Safety Depth All depths strictly superior to the value of this field are displayed in grey The depths that are inferior or equal t
205. me until reaching the limits of the square spiral that have been defined by the radius 148 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual SAR diagram x General properties Search conditions visibility Initial position 3 000 nm ase40 a7 1 18N O04 52 09 7 104 Search object a al Initial course 026 5 ManOverBoard E Radius R width 10 00000 nm Diagram type Parallel Ce Square spiral Length L 5 0000 nm C Sector vessel count 1 00 nm Spacing 5 C Parallel Vessel number Figure VI 13 Square Spiral Configuration The fist S length line is generally run head wind The square spiral shape is as follows 18 9S ceccecneubceceucqdecucuucencceenadance Centre of the square spiral Radius Figure VI 14 Square Spiral To create a square spiral SAR diagram 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Create SAR Diagram 2 If not already done check the Draw SAR Diagram box and then fill the General properties and Search conditions fields 3 In Diagram Type click Square spiral 4 Enter your desired value in Spacing S and click OK The diagram is displayed in the main view VI 5 3 SECTOR ROUTE Sector s route is recommended when a single ship searches in a limited circular area This type of route is drawn in a R radius circle which normally ranges from 2 to 5 nm Contrary to square spiral or parallel route t
206. more generic names 138 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 D l x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Navaids Depths View etc So the charts dumping prohibited name will be noted as Regulations in the note window Left click E Note ARCS E 215 x Nates SEE FELATED ADMIRALTY PUBLICATIONS Notices to Mariners recent imminent and temporary charges Sailing Miscellaneous Directions local conditions direct ons regula ions port information List of Lights List of Radio Signals navigational Vertical Datums warning and weather t ansmissions vessel traffic services port operations pilot services radiobeacons Tide Tables i Tidal Stream Atlases The Mariner s Handbook general information 5011 symbols and abbreviations etc IALA Region ENSURE CHARTS AND PUBLICATIONS ARE KEPT CORRECTED Sources WGS Shifts Wrecks Obstructions Fouls Navaids Currents Routeing Traffic Separation Regulations Military 4reas Traffic Separation CC do not display Miltary Areas 2 Vessel Traffic Services Figure V 58 Consulting ARCS Marnier s Notes To consult chart mariner s notes 1 Click the Charts menu and then click Mariner s Notes 2 The ARCS Notes window is displayed If you click Notes the list of mariner s notes is displayed When you select a mariner s note a checkmark is displayed in front of its mention ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 139 xSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual
207. n about this object is displayed on the right of the screen in the Consultation window You can consult the other objects in the main view in the scrolling list of the Consultation window Cell FR401580 Position 48 19 056 N 00494 1 611 W Buoy shape can Category of lateral mark port hand lateral mark Colour red Object name Basse Beuzec Topmark Topmark daymark shape cylinder Can Move object Annotate object Mark as deleted Figure V 46 Consulting an ENC Chart Object V 2 14 1 Consulting Information on a Cell To display information on a cell 1 Select an object of the cell 2 Inthe Consultation window click on the area corresponding to the cell Producer Name of the hydrographic organism that provided the cell If the first two letters ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 129 Q DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Edition Issue Date Update application Date Usage Compilation Scale Vertical Datum Sounding Datum 130 Gecdis v8 User s Manual of the cells name does not correspond to any of the identified organisms the window displays the following comment Non official data The number of publication and update of the cell The date of publication Usage of the cell Overview General Coastal Approach Harbour or Berthing This is the default scale of ENC charts Data is compiled with this scale The compilation scale is different from the scale that is only relative to the display So the value of the
208. ncel Figure 20 Adding Information to Information Windows 4 The Add information dialog box opens displaying the available information 5 Select a parent i e to which element information you will add must be related a When you select OWN SHIP as the parent the piece of information you will add will always concern the Own Ship even if you change it afterwards 6 The list of information is made with those on the parent and those absent from the window If you want to display all information check the Display all information box 7 Select the information you want to add 8 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just add by clicking Add 9 Optionally change the label by double clicking it or using the property button 10 Repeat the same steps anytime you want to add a piece of information 11 When finished click OK on the first dialog box ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 45 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Ill GECDIS DISPLAY The 1 3 1 section page 10 provides a detailed content of the screen Gecdis description This chapter presents different concepts to work properly with Gecdis lll 1 The scales Gecdis gives you the possibility to change the scale of the main view which default ranges from 1 100 to 1 100 000 000 This range may change depending on the chart module gr You can either change progressively the scale or assign directly a new scale Best Scale Chrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom 10 oom Fa Zoom
209. nd or function This is the case for the AIS and ARPA mobiles The AIS is an automated message exchange system between ships With it neighbour ships can have information on their journey VV kM A mobile is considered as an AIS whenever it is associated with the MMSI piece of information a The difference in the representation between ECDIS and ECS mode only play on color Whatever the method a dangerous mobile will always drawn in red IV 5 2 3 ARPA symbols ECDIS L ARPA target To be followed query LE ARPA target Followed tracking T1 IV 5 2 4 AIS symbols T2 T3 ARPA target Lost ECDIS AIS target Lost sleeping ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 11 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SIGHT SHARPER SENSES ECDIS AIS target Sleeping with neither reported heading nor COG Lb A AIS target Activated Mame Mame Mame Ki AIS target Lost activated AIS target Activated with neither reported heading nor COG Real AIS AtoN Off position Real AIS AtoN On position Virtual AIS AtoN Off position Ha Virtual AIS AtoN On position Lost off position Lost on position Activated Loste activated Activated IV 5 2 5 Advanced Activated AIS with true scaled outlines ECDIS mode 18 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Activated AIS with true scaled outlines ECS mode Lost ac
210. nformation must have been added to compute the height of the conning Example 7 0000000 m The distance that is run on water This piece of information depends on the SOW If SOW is invalid this piece of information is also invalid If you select None as a source but you specify a calculation rate distance on water is computed again at any interval of this period Example 406 861178 nm The distance that is run on water The value of this distance can be reset in the same way as an odometer to do so click the Mobile menu and then Reset Daily Counters This piece of information depends on SOW Example 15 265778 nm ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 85 A L_ LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES Run distance The distance that is run on ground This piece of information depends on SOG If software time SOG is invalid this piece of information is also invalid You must specify a calculation period to specify the interval between each recalculation of the piece of information Example 403 252878 nm Run distance daily The distance that is run on ground and can be reset in the same way as an Software time dead odometer to do so click the Mobile menu and then Reset Daily Counters reckoned This piece of information depends on SOG Example 14 238458 nm Meteo True wind speed dead The true wind speed that is computed from reckoned software e Apparent wind that comes from wind vane anemometer acq
211. ng radar range circle Click Delete in the pop up menu ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 147 A 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VI 5SAR Diagrams VI 5 1 OVERVIEW The Search and Rescue SAR system helps navigators to search an object ship man over board lost at sea SAR is used with three different diagrams Each diagram allows to display a different search route e By square spiral e By sectors e By parallels from 1 to 5 ships Those diagrams comply with those of the IAMSAR manual book 3 SAR diagram x General properties Search conditions Draw SAR diagram Visibility Initial position 3 000 nm 48 40 37 1 18N 004 S2 09 F 10W S i Search object Initial course 026 59 ManOverBoard E 10 00000 nm 1 00 pm Radius R width Spacing 3 i Parallel Square spiral Length L 5 0000 nm C Sector Wessel count Parallel Wessel number Figure VI 12 SAR Diagrams dialog box Search routes are configured through the SAR diagram dialog box This dialog box contains some general information that concerns all diagrams and information that is specific to each diagram So before selecting the type of diagram to be used general search properties should be set e The initial position of search e The initial route i e the orientation of the first leg which is generally run head wind If the true wind heading is avai
212. ngs I O and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab In Anticollision check Enable and then specify a DMP and a TDMP in the corresponding fields Check Periodic report 30 s to generate an alarm each 30 seconds in case of a collision risk Click OK o1 A W bh IV 4 1 2 Inconsistent Positions Several mobiles can be assigned to your ship a main one the Own Ship and other secondary ones Inconsistent positions aim at telling the user when the Own Ship s conning position is too different from secondary ships To do so you must enter an ELP Ecart limite de position Maximum difference between positions if the distance between positions of conning is superior or equal to ELP The following alarm is generated Inconsistent position with x difference y where x is the mobile that is too far from the Own Ship and y is the difference between positions Inconsistent Position Enable Maximum Distance between ships ELF 200 00 m Figure IV 9 Inconsistent position alarm parameters D ELP IS COMPUTED BETWEEN CONNING POSITIONS AND NOT SENSORS IN CASE OF OFFSETS WITH THE e GPS ANTENNA SEE IV 6 5 CONFIGURING INFORMATION P 94 To define inconsistent positions 1 Inthe System menu click Settings I O and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab 3 In Inconsistent Position check Enabl
213. nput Displays the incoming sentences e Output Displays the outgoing sentences e Pause Stops displaying the sentences until you click again on it e Reset Removes all displayed sentences from the window and displays the newly received or transmitted sentences e Text format Displays the sentences in text format An example of a sentence in text format IS GPZDA 160044 12 12 2001 5B e Hexadecimal Displays the sentences in hexadecimal format An example of a sentence in format hexadecimal format is 24 47 50 5A 44 41 2C 31 36 30 30 35 38 2C 31 32 2C 31 32 2C 32 30 30 31 2C 2C 2A 35 36 OD OA IV 6 2 2 Adding and Configuring a NET stream Gecdis allows to send or receive data via two types of network streams e UDP or NET e TCP IV 6 2 2 1 The UDP Stream UDP offers a connection faster than TCP with less reliability However this protocol allows to broadcast information on several machines So the UDP protocol will be preferred with big sized sentences that are sent so often that it wouldn t be important to lose some of them For any stream you must enter the port number input or output assigned to the machine that receives or sends sentences If you enter 0 as a port number transmission or reception will not be enabled If you enter another number you will be able to transmit or receive sentences provided the same number is configured on the machine that receives or transmits them So if 1001 is entered for an input port you
214. numeric value X D 3 3 AIS VDM COMPLEMENTARY INFORMATIONS TABLE Here is a summary of the different information from only the sentence AIS VDM Navigation Property emer mem AS mobiiclass o D 3 4 IXMIOFORMATEX MODULE INFORMATIONS TABLE Here is a summary of information from different formats supported by IXMloFormatEx module BAP DR Pos report Syletrack FAR2000 Pos rep BAP Mobile mobie 1 mobile mobie target mobie buoy se T 0 T T fe oo o Bearing S r g S r distance ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 137 s sl LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Or ARGOS ARGOS AUSSAGUEL DSNP FURUNO LHG SATLINK DR Pos report Syletrack FAR2000 Pos rep e xX acquired value e CG computed value e num numeric value d GE D Be a n i a J Py H Fd KL nu rem ss em ew E pes LK Lem r tem emm Aerm ml Le emp ei A mm s d w L COTZ gt Y II A Zi PAI EN Ty ef Y E F PIAI FCI i l 1 AQ ll Ti AVIVA Ff i af F i A isis i f TP Li r a AL mi ff A AA Amel a manne CAE Ft d st fiwvwvi l This chapter presents the different equipments for managing system own ship and trawl net informations The tables summarize the different possible sources of information The ranking of sentences indicates the priority if multiple automatic reception For software column here are the abbreviations c calculated value e estimated value m maintaine
215. o the value are displayed in black ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 125 D x3 L LJ ES Gecdis v8 User s Manual Security Options x Safety Contour and Background Colors chart Objects Raising Alarms Safety height H m Safe mode Shallow contour m Safety contour Safety depth Deep contour Default Values Figure V 38 Safety depth e Shallow Contour Represents the shallow waters value in medium blue iSecurity Options sl Safety Contour and Background Colors chart Objects Raising Alarms Safety height IT l Pa C Safe mode Unsafe mode Shallow contour Sy m Safety contour 30 m Safety depth a m Deep contour 30 m SPI Default Values e ellen A A eh SLES EE E ig id A ee Figure V 39 Shallow contour e Deep Contour Represents the deep waters value in white and pale blue 126 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Ss bows Security Options Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Safety height l m Shallow contour Safety contour 20 m Safety depth 0 m HI Deep contour Default Values on lz _ Figure V 40 Deep contour K gt THE DEEP CONTOUR IS ALWAYS SUPERIOR TO SAFETY CONTOUR AND SAFETY DEPTH To define the security contours 1 Click Charts and then Security 2 Click the Safe mode or Unsafe mode radio button depending on your desired mode 3 Ent
216. obile and then click the type of mobile you want to create 3 Optionally modify the name of the mobile Mobile Name field and or enter a comment Comment field Egg My GPS2 r E Postion ER UTE of position reference ae ER charted depth Hee Blue j Figure IV 36 Expanding Ship s Information 4 Expand information about the mobile clicking the cross H in front of its name A RED AND YELLOW SYMBOL KC MAY BE DISPLAYED IN FRONT OF A PIECE OF INFORMATION THIS v SYMBOL IS DISPLAYED WHEN THE PIECE OF INFORMATION IS INVALID A fleet is a group of mobiles that represent other mobile objects than your ship For example you will use a fleet for ARPA tracks There are two types of fleets e Dynamic fleet is a fleet that is configured with a source of acquisition to dynamically acquire mobile that compose it When a fleet is dynamic there is an indicator in brackets on the main page e Static fleet is a fleet that is configured with no source of acquisition of mobile In this case the operator can manually add mobile that compose it These mobiles are acquired or dead reckoned To create a fleet 1 Click Add and then Fleet 2 Inthe case of a dynamic fleet set the source of acquisition ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 93 AW L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SHARPER SENSES RS Note that you cannot insert anything but mobiles into a static fleet To insert a mobile into a fleet click the name of this fleet and insert the
217. objects remain in the same place 52 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 XSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual SI DS JON e E GE J i Se eee waning You didn ty i H Nk see ewe ew ee ee ee ee ee eee eee RE EE vi 001 36 00E 001 3S6 S0E ouszzh TEE Figure III 10 True motion vuu True motion mode is more powerful than relative motion To change the motion control mode do one of the following Click the Relative motion line in the Display menu The state of this line indicates the current mode e Use the shortcut for that see 1 2 1 page 6 IL A 32 Main view orientation There are three different orientations North up the view is oriented according the geographic north It s the default mode Warning You didn t choose to detect all the dangers ee ee rm rm mm rm rm em mm rm rm em rm rm rm em zm rm zl e zm rm zm em em rm em em rm rm em rm rm rm em em rm rm em rm rm rm em em rm re em em rm rm rm zm rm mm zm sl e e e e zi 50 53 40h EE Ze Sa K i bb Wi e Be sane Ze he 50 58 30M een ne ee et EE d K Ze w V Se Ting I I ia Se a I i So Ze ig i s Be I i i a Se Ve 1 a Mi 1 rss i a j 1 1 Den Ze 1 SIPSI 2 lt 2 2222222 22538 se sss 5 soe ssc sen eos Sees ees see assess a OSS SS555 50555 leen l kb Ze M Ze 001 25 00E 001 25 S0E 001 26 00E Figure III 11 North up orientation Head up the view is orien
218. off an alarm 1 Click the Charts menu and then Security 2 In the Security Options window select the Chart Objects Raising Alarms tab Check the object s to which an alarm is assigned Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Raising Alarms Environmentally sensitive areas E554 A ppu zl a cL cu a T cu vw Dangerous obstructions Buoys and beacons vw Dangerous wrecks Miltary practice areas vw Areas to be avoided Sea plane landing areas vw Prohibited areas Submarine transit lanes vw Restricted areas Anchorage areas vw Traffic separation zones vw Marine Farms cultures wv Inshore traffic zones Caution areas Particularly sensitive areas P 55 4 Offshore production areas Select All Unselect A Default Values OK Cancel Figure V 43 Chart objects raising alarms If all the objects are not selected the following text is displayed in the upper right corner of the chart view o WARNING You didn t choose to detect all the dangers F Figure V 44 Warning message detection To configure the danger detection option 1 Click the System menu Settings and then select General Configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Security tab 3 Do one of the following e To seta distance limit click the Maximum distance to danger nm and then select a value e To seta time limit click the Maximum time to danger minutes and then select a value 128
219. olbar Users Alarms Security Miscellaneous User Interface vw Back up data in Di Synchronize data on Black box with periodic system report 1 min OK Cancel Apply Figure Il 16 Making Back up Data of Gecdis Configuration To activate a back up 1 Click the System menu Settings General Configuration and then the Miscellaneous tab 2 Check the Back up data in check box 3 Input or click the browser button to select the folder into which configuration files and folders will be copied BACKUP is added to the access path you have selected 4 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply To stop the back up management 1 On the Miscellaneous tab of the Configuration dialog box uncheck the Back up data in check box 2 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply 11 8 2 SYNCHRONIZING DATA lt is possible to save data of several stations in two ways e Sharing data folders on every machine e Creating locally a back up folder and sharing this folder on every machine The synchronization consists in replicating exactly data in every machine of the network This replication is made every 5 seconds each machine checks whether changes have been made on the other machines and automatically synchronizes and replaces its folders with new ones synchronized data is located in the root of the DATA folder of Gecdis installation folder The DATA folder includes ENC
220. olour in the middle of each leg it is corrected to the nearest whole number e NEXT name next destination waypoint name e Heading to steer heading to steer to follow the selected route This value takes into account the drift e XTE current cross track error from Own Ship position to the route lane This value can be preceded by lt lt if the ship must steer to the left to reach the route or gt gt if the ship must steer to the right WOD wheel over distance from the current Own Ship position to the wheel over line WOTTG wheel over time to go corresponding to WOD and Own Ship SOG WOT UTC date and time of arrival to wheel over line according UTC SOG and WOD Final ETA The estimated time UTC of arrival to the last waypoint of the route TO name WO2 WOD 1159 m TO NEXT course 262 3 WOTTG Simin 33s NEXT name WOs WOT 08 53 45 Heading to steer 201 7 Final ETA 09 29 39 XTE lt lt 526 4 m 11 07 2013 Figure VII 14 Pilot View VII 3 8 AUTOPILOT CONTROL The autopilot control allows you to select the type of autopilot to use and the sentences to transmit There are four autopilot modes e Manual this mode which is selected by default allows you to start the autopilot manually or end one of the other modes This implies that Gecdis sends no command to the pilot e Steering course allows you to follow a continuous heading When this mode is enabled a route is displayed with the entered heading and the Pil
221. omment and then select the desired IP address To receive sentences enter in the first Port field the Port field number of the Transmission group of the machine that sends you sentences To transmit sentences check Port in Transmission and then enter the number of the Port field of the machine that receives sentences Whenever you specify a number for the output port the NMEA output branch is added to NET1 and allows you to configure the sentences to be transmitted see IV 6 2 5 page 91 Optionally check the IP box If you enter the IP address of the machine that receives sentences data is directly sent to a single machine If not transmission is in broadcast mode In the case that several machines transmit data on the same port but you do not want to receive sentences that come from each of them filter the sentences doing one of the following or both in the Input filter group zone e To receive the sentences that are transmitted on a single port check the Port box and then enter the appropriate port number e To receive the sentences that come from a single IP address check the IP box and then enter the machine s IP address to learn more about finding the IP address of a machine see Finding the IP Address of a Machine Optionally fill the Comment field The comment is displayed into brackets in the left hand list after the name of the network stream If you click cy input and output data of the remote machine is displa
222. on and computation The command is enabled when the corresponding button is pressed AS MANY CONTROLS ARE MADE TO UPDATE INFORMATION AND REPRODUCE WHAT HAS CHANGED THIS BUTTON REDUCES THE PERFORMANCE OF YOUR MACHINE WE ADVISE YOU TO DISABLE IT IF YOU WANT TO SPEED UP THE PROCESSES To display real time pieces of information 1 Click the Mobile menu and then UO Summary 2 Inthe IO Summary window click Real Time IV 6 7 3 Printing the Summary Window When printing a Summary window you reproduce on a paper the tables that are currently displayed in the I O Summary window So if you are in basic mode only the configuration that relates to basic modes will be printed out This operation can be performed either in Landscape or in Portrait mode depending on the configuration of your printer Printing the synthesis opens a window allowing to preview the summary A toolbar allows to act on this preview To print the summary window 1 Select the summary display mode with the Basic Mode button 2 Click Print ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 99 i x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 3 Inthe Print before Preview window click Print 100 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 7 Dead Reckoning The Dead Reckoning dialog box allows you to change manually all dead reckoned pieces of information for any ship Position
223. on are displayed in blue e g a position acquired in differential mode Normal quality pieces of information are displayed in black white e Invalid pieces of information are displayed in red e g a piece of information whose acquisition maximum timeout is over X 1 06 444 N Ground vector 18 0 kn 275 9 True heading 275 9 0017 22 741 E Water vector 18 0 kn 275 9 Depth 22 9 m Figure 17 Default information bar 1 Ownship UTC 18 06 2013 09 39 26 Distance from Own Ship x xxxx Cursor XX XX XXX 7 XXK XX XXX 7 Bearing from Own Ship XX Figure 18 Default information bar 2 System To skip from a bar to another click on it To configure a bar right click on it and then click Customize see II 10 page 44 1 3 1 6 3 Information pages Information pages allow to display previously selected pieces of information in another form than information bars To display information pages you must select the corresponding command in the View menu Three tabs are selected by default each of them displaying pieces of information by theme about the Own Ship the system and route monitoring You can add or delete tabs and or pieces of information to create themes For this right clicking on the window and clicking Customize see II 10 page 44 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 13 A 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Position conning 50 56 591 N 001 41 212 E Ground vector 18 0
224. or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original MaxSea position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a MaxSea user object folder 1 Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then MaxSea File 2 Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s 3 In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window VII 2 4 5 QuodFish Import You can import user data provided by QuodFish It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original QuodFish However you may notice that some objects can be displayed with a different symbol or a different colour To import a QuodFish user object folder 1 Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then QuodFish File 2 Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s 3 In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window 156 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q l xs L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual VII 2 5 EXPORTING A USER OBJECT You can export your user objects to the database of one of the following systems e Gecdis e TurboWin S
225. oreontal tolkar Figure III 6 e Use the shortcuts for that see 1 2 1 page 6 11 4 2 ON ANY MOBILE To centre on mobile do one of the following e In mobile list see IV 3 page 67 select the mobile and click Centre button sage Track Start Colour Fleets f Name A oe COG CPA TOPA Position Ships vi PRO MED OD r 7 05 17 5k OF3 0 1 98 6min 51 02 895 N 001 S6 662 E JAS ei PANTOKRATORAS imin O 1 kn 089 07 757 3 den 50 58 180 N 001 51 562 E i CG arpa F FAULA 6 05 9 1 kn 277 0 3 02 39mi 51 03 699 N 001 S6 066 E PETER FABER amin 0 0 kn we E 50 57 837 M 001 S1 163 E S F PHILIPP ESSBERGER 5 05 134kn 229 7 2 60 1h2 50 55 523 W 001 11 092 E lt PRIDE OF AQUITA 6 05 15 2kn 129 0 5 34 7min 51 02 590 N 001 28 720 E vi al d Figure III 7 Centre command in mobile list ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 51 x z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e In mobile list see IV 3 page 67 double click on the mobile This action is special not only because it will centre the screen but also add mobile services in the Object Watch window This case is particularly interesting to follow the mobile and other e Inthe main view if the mobile is displayed select it with right click Then click on the Centre button in
226. osition is available Example 32 06 01500 S 060 46 30500 E lt WGS84 gt The UTC that corresponds to the last reference position of the mobile Example 14 12 2001 11 14 54 The position of Own Ship s stem that relates to the conning position as defined in the Sizes tab of Own Ship s characteristics To open this tab and change the value you should click the name of the desired mobile and then edit the L length field in the Sizes tab Example 12 52 294 N 115 217150 W Position ship s transom This position is also related to the conning which can be modified in the Sizes tab of ship s characteristics The position of ship s conning This piece of information is added if position has been adjusted in the Corrections tab of the ship s Position piece of information see IV 6 5 page 94 To compute the value the Own Ship s true heading must be valid The speed over ground The speed over ground of a ship Example 10 00 kn The course over ground The real course of the ship Example 100 0 The speed over water The speed over the water Example 2 00 kn This piece of information takes into account true heading and leeway angle COW True heading leeway angle Example 185 000000 The heading that is related to geographical north The angle is the crossing of the axis of geographical north and ship s headline When adding this piece of information COW is also added If no leeway angl
227. ot view is displayed with COW and Heading to steer information e Track Keeping launches the route monitoring mode If the Ship is outside the lane of the planned route the Pilot view is displayed with the information concerning the first waypoint of the route If the Ship is inside the lane information about the next waypoint of the route is displayed 164 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Pilot to one Waypoint allows creating a one legged temporary route between the Ship and the entered coordinates It is not possible to save this type of route Status Gutpuks Manual Steering Course Heading To Steer O00 00 Pilot to one Waypoint OO OO OOO0ON OO0 00 OOO00E yh OK Cancel Figure VII 15 Autopilot control dialog To open the autopilot control dialog box 1 Inthe Navigation menu click Autopilot control To use the steering course mode 1 In the Autopilot Control dialog box select Steering Course option and then enter a value in the Heading to Steer field 2 Click OK or Apply 3 A dotted line is displayed with the same heading as the one you entered To follow the mentioned course you will have to follow this line To use the route monitoring mode 1 To start do one of the following actions e In the Autopilot dialog box select the Track keeping option If your ship is not in the lane of the route to follow a message display
228. other waypoint 2 A pop up menu opens Do one of the following e Click Insert Wpt After if you want to insert a waypoint after the selected waypoint e Click Insert Wpt Before if you want to insert a waypoint before the selected waypoint 3 Drag the mouse to insert the new waypoint in your desired location Waypoint n 4 Properties waypoint Mame Position OO 00 OO000N ODO0D20O0TO0D00O0E P Turn radius Comment Previous leg Max ATE 1000 0 m Type Rhumb line Great circle Display Context lt None gt e OK Cancel Figure VII 8 New waypoint dialog other than for the 1 point To delete a waypoint 1 Doone of the following actions e Inthe Route Properties dialog box select one of the line of the table and click d In the main view the selected waypoint is removed if you click OK A new leg links the waypoints that used to be positioned before and after the deleted waypoint e Select a route and then the waypoint you want to delete in this route right clicking it Click Delete Wpt in the pop up menu The waypoint is deleted To edit a waypoint and change its properties 1 Double click the line of the waypoint you want to change or click it and click The Waypoint Properties dialog box is displayed This dialog box is divided in one or two areas Waypoint and optionally Previous Leg if you have selected any line but the first one 2 The Waypoint Properties dialog box is displayed Modify the properties
229. ove or below a datum Apparent Wind Wind value that results from two movements the speed of the ship and the true wind The apparent wind is the wind that a person feels on a moving ship i e the wind that is acquired by and anemometer and a weather vane Area Polygon that is inserted by the user and can be associated with a radar alarm Barometric Pressure The measure of atmospheric pressure that is given by way of a barometer and is expressed in kilopascal Basic display The information level at which no data can be eliminated from the display This information is required in all geographical areas and in all circumstances It is not enough however to guarantee completely safe navigation Azimuth in which a seamark is located Bearing Range Lines Navigational aid that allows to display the relative heading and the distance between two objects on the screen Bridge Height The difference between bridge height and draught Calculation rate The rhythm sentences are transmitted Cell A geographical area containing cartographic data Each cell has a separate unique name Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area into the cells which they publish CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point see Conning position Channelling Assignation of a display context to the leg of a route Chart area Part of the screen that displays navigation chart data Gecdis screen is made up of a number of sections that may or may not be displayed
230. ow only visible charts is an option allowing you to list only the charts that are displayed in the main view By default the window lists all the charts available 4 Click Select to load and display the cell V 2 11 UPDATING V 2 11 1 Semi Automatic Updating This type of updating consists in importing copying or updating a cell from removable media like CDs IHO or their distributors provide these updates After updating one or more cell s a report tab named Last Import ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 115 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual is displayed in the Charts Database dialog box The dialog box lists all updates and offers you to accept or reject them Charts Database Note that the report area is available only when importing data and remains displayed during all the session Charts History Permits SA Certificate Last Import x Name Edition usage Scale Issue Date Application Center on Cell BE3YLBNK 16 6 Coastal 1 90 000 26 03 2010 06 04 2009 BE4VLBNK 4 7 Approach 1 45 000 26 03 2010 06 04 2009 Import Commercial BESANTWN 12 8 Harbour 1 22 000 06 07 2010 12 10 2009 Exchange Set BESANTW2Z 8 8 Harbour 1 12 000 17 05 2010 01 10 2008 BESKGETE S Harbour 1 12 000 02 09 2009 02 09 2009 Import Catalogue 1 4000 12 02 2010 2 02 2010 BESZEEBR Harbour 1 4000 23 03 2010 23 03 2010 Import Cells BH450064 3 0 Approach 1 45000 05 07 2010 05 07 20
231. ows you to use Gecdis as a radar Bathy allows you to configure and display the bathymetry You can display a coloured layer representing charted depth and also isolines e AMLs presents the commands required to use additional data layers that have been designed to satisfy maritime defence requirements e Weather allows you to display wind and pressure parameters at a particular day and time e Tide allows you to display and configure the display of tides i THE DISPLAY OF THE MENU BAR DEPENDS ON USER RIGHTS LOGGED ON FOR EXAMPLE BY DEFAULT e NAVIGATORS AND GUESTS USERS DO NOT HAVE ACCESS 1 3 1 3 Title bars Each window or dialog box contains a title bar Some of them display a title others display several pieces of information that cannot be modified which is the case for the title bar of the main view ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 11 X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 00 000 WL Sod Dipddupg Di Figure 1 13 Main view b hts in meters Display Stan ar title The pieces of information are as follows The motion control type TM or RM The chart type ENC ARCS The projection The scale The datum And possibly other information provided by the cartographic module 1 3 1 4 Status bar This is an area at the bottom of the software window dedicated to the display of system informations and waiting messages 15 39 056 50 52 S19N O001 3S0 756E 212 8 11 19
232. p To do so click the Navigation menu and then Own Ship Bearing Range Line ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 141 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual VI 2Clearing Lines A clearing line is a half line constructed from seamarks which shall not be crossed Clearing lines are managed by the areas module Such as lines they generate alarms as soon as they are crossed But contrary to user lines the alarm is generated only when it is crossed by the own ship There are two types of clearing lines e The NMT clearing line means that in order to clear the danger the bearing of the mark should be not more than the specified value e The NLT clearing line means the bearing of the mark should be not less than the specified value i La Figure VI 3 No Less and No More Clearing Lines To add a clearing line no more no less 1 You should locate a seamark Click Navigation and then Clearing Line No More or Clearing Line No Less Click the seamark that can be used as a reference and drag down the mouse to draw a line far enough from the dangerous point that is at the right of the ship The clearing line is displayed in orange In its middle NMT x is displayed where NMT means no more or no less than x defines the bearing to the north The created clearing lines are stored in the List of User Objects in the Areas folder List of User Objects Folder Ship
233. peration on a wide area This type of route is drawn in a R width rectangle Each ship implied in the search follows a trajectory The trajectory of your ship is drawn with a bolded orange line whereas this of the other ships are drawn in dotted lines To configure parallel route you should specify The spacing between lines S The width of the search rectangle R The length of each line L The initial position of the diagram P The number of ships that take part to the search N which ranges from 2 to 5 The number of the ship s trajectory that corresponds to the ship s number 150 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Q l X3L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual SAR diagram x General properties h Draw SAR diagram Initial position 48 40 37 1 18N 004 52 09 7 10 Initial course 026 5 Radius R width 10 00000 nm Search conditions visibility 3 000 ppm Search object ManOverBoard Spacing 5 Diagram type Parallel Square spiral Length L 10 0000 pm C Sector vessel count Ce Parallel Vessel number Figure VI 17 Configuring parallel route Depending on the number of ships you can draw different diagrams The number of ships should depend on the radius and the length of the lines This type of route is drawn in a rectangle whose sides are S and R S First line Ship s trajectory Figure VI 18 Diagram with two
234. performed it is possible to compute the position where the ship is more likely to be located this is the fixed point This point can then be used to reset dead reckoned positions Set EP VLA 2 USING PILOTING FIX Piloting fixes are often determined with several bearings the position of the Own Ship is deduced from bearings that have been made at different times The fixes move the same way as the Own Ship Figure VI 9 A fix after two bearings Figure VI 10 A fix after three bearings After two bearings a line is displayed in the main view You can either e Validate the point and put it in the main view Fix Point button e Validate the point to adjust the position of the ship on this point The ECDIS symbol with DR label will be displayed on the main view Set EP button e Not validate the point and keep it for a moment on the screen before deleting it All the operations are performed with the Piloting Fix dialog box This dialog box consists in two parts e the first one allows to make fixes that correspond to a bearing and or a radar range e the second one displays information about the fix the bearing range between the reference position of the Own Ship and allows to perform several operations Fix point Specifies in a graphical way a specific position at a specific time of the fix point Whenever you click the button UTC is displayed in orange Observed point at current time Observed point at a specific time
235. phic coverage This operation is made by clicking the appropriate column header You can notice which column is sorted out with the arrow that is indicated in this header IF YOU HAVE FILTERED CHARTS ONLY THOSE THAT ARE KEPT AFTER APPLYING THE FILTER WILL BE LISTED IN THE LIST OF CHARTS Centre on Filter A Cha Producer Name Usage Geographic Coverage Issue Date Update Date Import Date a ENC ES E5504421 Harbour NE 36 48 396 N 006 19 536 W SW 36 43 434 N 006 28 782 W 03 10 2003 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U210150 General NE 07 00 000 5 157 30 000 E SW 10 00 000 5 150 00 000 E 25 11 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U220140 General NE 10 00 000 5 150 00 000 E SW 20 00 000 5 140 00 000 E 30 09 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U220150 General NE 10 00 000 5 157 30 000 E SW 20 00 000 5 150 00 000 E 10 06 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U230140 General NE 20 00 000 5 150 00 000 E SW 22 40 000 5 140 47 000 E 10 06 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U230150 General NE 20 00 000 5 157 30 000 E SW 22 40 000 5 150 00 000 E 10 06 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U314145 Coastal NE 13 35 000 5 145 09 200 E SW 14 00 000 5 145 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4315146 Coastal NE 14 16 000 5 146 09 000 E SW 15 00 000 5 146 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U318147 Coastal NE 17 5S3 423 5 147 32 566 E SW 18 00 000 5 147 00 000 E o7 o1 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U319147 Coastal NE 18 00 000 5 148 00 000 E SW 19 00 000 5 147 00 00
236. placement mode e Check Automatic off centering depending on course over ground to select the anticipated mode e Uncheck to select the centered mode You can adjust the area ratio from 50 to 90 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 2 Gecdis v8 User s Manual XSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES II 2 Configuring the units The Format tab allows you to choose the unit you will define for some parameters position distance speed size height temperature pressure and angular velocity and the number of figures after the decimal point For example if 1 x has been configured for the Height field 20 44 kn will be rounded up to the first figure after the decimal point 20 4 kn To access the Format tab 1 Inthe System menu click Settings and General configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Format tab Security Miscellaneous User InterFace Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms LA Units Precision Position EIER NG lU Aal M Distance Mautical mile NM e Automatics e Speed Automatics IL Size lt A4utomatic gt Automatic Height depth altitude lt 4utomatic gt Automatic Temperature 9 lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt Pressure 4utomatic gt lt Automatic Angular velocity lt Autormatic gt lt Automatic UTM default zone Auto OK Cancel Figure IA Configuring the Format of Units The configuration of the position is particular
237. played in the Imported Feature window as well as the user who added the annotation and the date and time The annotation can be removed by clicking Remove Annotation Mark as deleted lf you delete this feature it is mentioned in the Imported Feature window as well as the user who added the annotation and the date and time ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 111 2 LL LU E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 5 GETTING INFORMATION ON THE CELLS In the History tab click the Charts button to display all the cells imported and available in the application Charts Database Charts History Permits 5A Certificate Last Import Charts Operations a IMPORT NO143000 Ed 1 0 on 08 26 10 at 15 05 11 MANUPDATE by Administrator on 08 26 2010 at 12 19 46 S INSERTED UO CTNARE D4ATST420100830 63 47 99076N 007 24 SS306E Figure V 15 Information on a cell Click a cell to get several types of information on it e IMPORT GB5X01SW Edition 1 Update 0 on 12 14 05 at 14 59 43 This means the GB5X01SW 000 file has been imported on the 14th of December 2005 at 14h 59 mn 43 s This is a new edition update 0 which has been replaced by the former one e IMPORT GB5X01SW Edition 1 Update 1 on 12 14 05 at 15 00 07 The GB5X01SW 001 file has been imported on the 14th of December 2005 at 15 h 00 mn 7 s This is an update update 1 that changes the 1 0 cell Edition 1 Update 0 that
238. r imported ENCs charts are listed in the Last Import tab with the status Inserted Modified Deleted Select the updates you want to reject and click Reject Update 6 Close the Chart Database dialog box by clicking on the small cross in the right upper corner You can close this dialog box clicking the little cross in the upper right corner GN Ol WHEN YOU REJECT AN UPDATE IT IS ANNOTATED WITH AN ORANGE MARK AND A TEXT THAT INDICATES e THIS HAS BEEN REJECTED UPDATE IS APPLIED V 2 11 2 Manual Updating Manual updating is the second type of updates It consists in modifying the ENC cell by creating a user object and modifying a chart object or a mariner s object that has already been created Mariner s objects can be either a point or an area All the objects are annoted with an orange mark You can e Create a point object e Create an area e Annotate an object e Mark achart object as deleted This is a specific kind of annotation e Move a point object of the official chart This object is then marked as deleted and a new identical 116 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual object is created on the new position To consult an existing chart object 1 You should select it on the chart by clicking on it and clicking Selection or by clicking on it while holding the Ctrl key in Centre mode The consultation window shows in its lower part several buttons The list of buttons varies if
239. rary followed by the ship that links two remote points and possibly separated with intermediate points There are two ways of creating a route e With the cursor e With the Route Properties dialog box To create a route with the cursor 1 Inthe Navigation menu click Create Route with Cursor 2 Click in the main view where you want to insert your first waypoint in the main view 3 Drag the mouse and click where you want to insert your second waypoint Do the same thing for the other waypoints 4 Right click when you want to finish your route 5 When you right click the leg you have just created will be deleted if you have not first clicked on the left button 6 The Route Properties dialog box displays information about the waypoints of the route To validate your route click OK To create a route with a list of waypoints 1 Inthe Navigation menu click Create Route with list 2 The Route Properties dialog box displays 3 Edit the first waypoint by entering values in the editable fields Name and Position and by clicking non editable fields to access the Waypoint Properties dialog box Waypoint n 1 Properties Waypoint Mame Position OOOO OOO00N ODO0S0O0T00000E P Turn radius Comment OK Cancel Figure VII 5 Waypoint properties dialog for the 1 point 4 Add the other waypoints clicking the l button or with the keyboard doing the following e Press the Ctrl Enter key combination to add
240. ration dialog box that s why it can be useful to sum up all of them in the same location i e an HTML based synthesis Basic mode Realtime Print Input Output Summary basic System UTC Distance Own Ship Cursor Bearing Own Ship Cursor TTG Own Ship Cursor ETA Own Ship Cursor CPA Own Ship Cursor alue 09 07 2013 10 42 27 XXXXX oer X X5 EE x xxxxXNM Source Software Software Software Software Software Software Stream Calc rate ixBlue Value Source Stream Calc rate Position 51 00 262N 001 19 446E lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt SOG 18 0kn lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt COG 116 8 lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt sow 18 0kn lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt True heading 116 8 lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt ixBlue DR Yalue Source Stream Calc rate Position 50 04 131N 000 06 403E Estimate 1 0s SOG 0 0kn Software COG 000 0 Software sow 0 0kn Estimate True heading 080 0 Estimate Leeway angle 10 0 Estimate Drift speed 0 0kn Estimate Drift course o95 0 Estimate Swaying speed 0 0kn Software Swaying course 350 0 Software Fleets alue Source Stream Calc rate AIS 64 NMEA YDM AIS VHF message TCP1 555erveur arpa 12 NMEA TTM TCP1 555erveur Figure IV 43 Input Output summary in Basic mode To open the summary window 1 Click the Mobile menu and then click UO Summary IV 6 7 1 Synthesis in Basic and Advanced Modes Information report
241. res to the bottom Depth is the sum between charted depth and height of tide Depth contour A line linking points that are at the same depth in the water column Depth soundings Soundings deeper than the safety depth Display Base The level of SENC information that cannot be removed from the display consisting of information that is required at all times in all geographic areas and all circumstances It is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation Display Context Specific properties of software s configuration Display Scale The ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground normalized and expressed as for example 1 10 000 Distance to waypoint The distance between the Own Ship and the next waypoint Distance to wheel over The distance between the Own Ship and the next wheel over 180 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES DPT Sentence that allows to acquire depth i e the depth that relates to the transducer and the offset of the transducer A positive offset indicates the distance between the transducer and the waterline A negative offset indicates the distance between the transducer and the keel DR Dead Reckonning abbreviation Vertical distance measured between the waterline and the lower part of the keel in the section of the ship that is considered about ECDIS Electronic Chart Electronic Chart Display and Info
242. rmation System When provided with Display and Information adequate backup devices this system is considered as the equivalent of an System updated maritime chart in accordance with the V 20 regulation of the 1974 s SOLAS Convention It allows to display the selected information from a navigation electronic chart SENC and the positional information provided from navigation sensors to help navigators to plan routes and monitor them If desired the system also allows to display additional information that is related to the navigation The navigation information system which with adequate backup arrangements can be accepted as complying with the up to date chart required by regulation V 20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention by displaying selected information from a system electronic navigational chart SENC with positional information from navigation sensors to assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring and by displaying additional navigation related information Economic Speed Default speed assigned to a leg if no other speed has been assigned to it Generic term to designate a device that displays chart data but is not intended to meet OMI s ECDIS operating standards requirements and check the need to import maritime charts ENC A database standardized as to content structure and format issued for use with ECDIS on the authority of government authorized Hydrographic Offices The ENC contains all the chart information necessa
243. rrrnnnrrene 127 V 2 14 Consulting Information ON AN Obert 129 V 3 ARCS CHARTS otc sos setae EEEE EE EEEE E E aE 131 V 3 1 EE 131 V 3 2 En CC 134 V 3 3 Consulting Information about Charts cccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeceeecseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeaeneeeeees 137 VI INAVGATION WEE 140 VI 1 BEARING LINES AND BEARING RANGE LINES eeeeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE REENEN 140 WIZ CLEARING LINES ee 142 VIS GEOGRAPHIC CALCULATIONS geesde gege 144 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 vil L DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES vill Gecdis v8 User s Manual VILA PILOTING EE 146 VE WE e EE 146 Wi Are Using piloting Ki EE 146 WED SAR DIAG E 148 AE Ze OVENI a E ee ee eee ee eee 148 Vu Ee EE TER e LC 148 VI 5 3 Sector Route EE 149 at ere 150 VII SEET Tee 153 VIT DATABASES en 153 VII 2 MANAGING USER OBJECTS ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn a 154 VII 2 1 General Operation on User Objects ccccccccceeeeeeeeceeeaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaaagsseeeeess 154 VIIL2 2 List of Ee 154 VIL2 3 Configuring the filters AAA 155 VIL2ZA Importing user ele 155 VIIL 2 5 Exporting a user object rcctis cencscasconceceesanesccoedvedeneaosesiensenddveesexesceeedvadsadeaseveessandeuaatenesseeueps 157 VRS en 158 VES GENO e Du 158 VIE PROU POP UES serrera a EE E T R TE 159 AIS E Planning a e 161 VISA CID ALIN a TOUTS EE 162 VII 3 5 Representation Of a route 162 VIL3 6 Switching in rout
244. rs and or Is Leaving if you want to send an alarm when the mobile enters and leaves the area Click the Points List tab You can insert or delete a point in this tab 10 When finished click OK 176 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Ah L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 7 Circles and sectors The circle functionality enables to insert circular typoe areas Alarms can be assigned to a circle they are generated whenever a mobile enters or leaves the circle The sector crowns functionality enables to insert operation areas This functionality enables to create four types of objects A crown A sector A circle A sector of circle The creation of a sector is performed in 4 steps Selecting the centre of the sector Defining the exterior radius of the sector Defining the first and last angles of the sector Defining the radius range Centre of the Sector First Angle External Radius Internal Radius Last Angle Figure VII 27 Example of a Sector To create a sector 1 Click the User Objects menu and Create Sector Then click the location in the main view in which you wish to put the centre of the sector Drag the mouse to make a circle As you drag the mouse sector s radius and angle are displayed Click and do one of the following For the angle to represent the first angle of the sector move the mouse clockwise For the angle to represent the last angle of the
245. rtificate ST Unknown L Monaco O International Hydrographic Organization HO OU International Hydrographic Bureau HE CN IHO 5 63 Scheme Administrator Issue to C MC ST Unknown L Monaco O International Hydrographic Organization IHO OU International Hydrographic Bureau HE CN IHO 5 63 Scheme Administrator Expiry date 29 08 2013 Figure V 19 Load certifiacte V 2 10 CHART LOADING MODES The ENC module allows you to use two different chart loading modes automatic loading and manual loading Automatic loading allows to e Load automatically all chart cells covering the area displayed on screen e Load only charts that correspond to a specific navigational purpose You can either select one out of the six navigation purposes Overview General Coastal Approach Harbour and Berthing Only charts whose navigational purpose corresponds to the option you have selected will be loaded 114 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Manual loading allows to select only a specific chart To use the chart automatic loading mode 1 Click the Charts menu and then point to Chart Loading Mode 2 Doone of the following e To load all charts automatically click Automatic Coverage e To load charts with the same chart usage as ECDIS usage point to Fixed Usage and select one of the options Display Centre on Own Ship Fe Orientation w Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place Scale Best
246. ry for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart e g sailing directions which may be considered necessary for safe navigation Estimated time that is necessary to reach a destination State of a target Situation of an ARPA target Lost To be Tracked or Tracked Event Isolated object that is inserted by the user to show an event in the location of the Own Ship EW Size Indication that gives the distance between the more eastern and western points of an area Extreme Draught Draught that cannot be exceeded by the Own Ship FILE Stream that uses a file to receive information Final ETA Estimated time of arrival to the last wheel over of the route Element of a data classification system that allows to arrange files documents softwares in a coherent way GGA NMEA sentence that defines data of a positioning system NMEA sentence that defines the geographical position Great Circle Route of a ship that consists in following in the Earth an arc of a Great Circle i e the shorter distance line to go from one point to another ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 181 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Key that is connected on the parallel or USB port of the computer and allows to use the software Also it makes it possible to use a specific configuration on HASP Key another computer without any enabling In such a case
247. s representing your ship Imagine you acquire your position with a GPS but you also use dead reckoning to estimate it You will then create two mobiles one mobile will represent the GPS and the other one dead reckoning This way if your GPS experiences operating problems you will be able to check it comparing GPS and dead reckoning data e Mobiles in a fleet Contrary to the mobiles that represent your ship these mobiles do not necessarily represent ships They define any object liable to move buoys targets etc and consequently needing to be followed Before creating them you should create a fleet e Specific mobiles i e independent mobiles that do not belong to a fleet that not necessarily represent your ship You can create a mobile in different ways depending on specific navigation circumstances that s why different pieces of information are assigned to each of them when creating them You can create up to three different types of mobiles e Dead reckoned mobiles e Acquired mobiles that are intended to receive pieces of information by a sensor The AIS pilot that allows you to acquire information about the NMEA AIS VHF Own vessel VDO sentence To create a mobile 1 In the left hand list of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box select the fleet you want to add to the mobile if a fleet has already been created or click System if you want to add a mobile representing your ship 2 Click Add and then M
248. s warning you that you can t start the route monitoring and the Manual mode is selected e Inthe Navigation menu click Start Route Monitoring 2 To stop the route monitoring mode do one of the following e Inthe Autopilot Control dialog box select the Manual radio button e Click the Navigation menu and Stop Track Keeping To use the autopilot on a waypoint 1 Click the Pilot to one waypoint radio button 2 Doone of the following actions e Enter the position of the point to be reached e Click s and then click the desired location into the chart 2 Click OK To transmitt sentences to the autopilot 1 Inthe Autopilot Control dialog box click the Outputs tab 2 Select the stream that will transmit the sentences check the sentences you want to transmit and click OK ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 165 E LL Gecdis v8 User s Manual VII 3 9 THE CHANNEL VIEW The Channel View is a plane representation of the main view It gives e An overview of the route followed by the ship e A better understanding on how the Ship is moving That s why this window is oriented in leg up mode according to the route direction Its behaviour is the same as the main view For example when you select a mobile in the main view it is also selected in the Channel View Functions that can be applied to the route monitoring are available in the channel view You can modify the scale from 1 1 200 to 1 45 000 and the grid each square ma
249. scale or grid 3 Select Scale or Grid and click your desired value VII 3 10 CHANNELLING Channelling allows you to assign a display context to the route leg So you can define specific properties scale dedicated windows to display etc for each leg Channelling is only active in route monitoring mode To assign a channeling to a leg 1 Define your desired display context for the leg 2 Access the waypoint edition dialog box selecting it right clicking and clicking Edit Waypoint 3 Select your desired display context in the Display Context scrolling list of the Waypoint Properties dialog box 166 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 11 IMPORTING EXPORTING ROUTES One of Gecdis features consists of importing and exporting with a hard or removable disk all user objects created by the user Another feature enables to export or import routes from streams COM NET and FILE So in case the user stored routes on his her GPS he she should be able to recover them in the software The main benefit of this feature import export is to Support communication between several systems Gecdis gt Gecdis Gecdis gt Turbo etc To import a route via a stream 1 You must have previously enabled a stream when configuring the mobiles If this has not been done yet click System Settings I O and Mobiles and then Input Output Mobile Configuration In the dialog
250. sector move the mouse counter clockwise Click once again and drag the mouse to define sector s width oO of W PDP To create a circle 1 Click the User Object menu and then Create Circle Click in the main view where you want to insert the circle drag down your mouse to create a circle and then click 2 The properties of the circle you have just created are displayed in the New Circle dialog box In the General tab enter a name for this circle in the Name field a date in the Date field the position of the centre of the circle and the radius 3 Select a colour a pattern and a line and if you want enter a comment If you want to assign an alarm click the Alarms tab 5 When the circle is defined click OK iN ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 177 A 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 8 Text To create a text 1 Click User Objects menu and then Create Text and then click in the main view where you want to insert a text 2 The Text dialog box looks like a typical text editor In the blank window enter your text Times New Roman Occidental 1 170 se Bs H Ki k My text S beautiful Date 11 07 2013 15 27 58 Position 50 35 45710N 000 S2 65349E P OK Cancel Apply Figure VII 28 Text properties dialog 3 Format your text with the formatting bar You can Change your font e Change the size of your font Change the general appearance of the font assigning to it
251. ships Ship s trajectory e Leef leide Zi are 9 8 4 1 1 4 8 i 4 amp Figure VI 19 Diagram with three ships ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 151 Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Ship s trajectory 6 2 6 L e a att ie ae di i Te eo Y K 3 411 4 BD La 8 Figure VI 20 Diagram with four ships To create a parallel type SAR diagram 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Create SAR Diagram 2 If not already done check the Draw SAR Diagram and then fill the General properties and Search conditions fields 3 In Diagram type click Parallel Enter your desired values for Spacing S and for the fields of the Parallel zone 5 Click OK The diagram is displayed in the main view iN 152 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII USER OBJECTS Vil 1 Databases and folders A database can be compared to a cabinet in which you would store much information All user objects that you will create will be stored in databases By default a database called IxBlue is created while installing Gecdis This database is a mdb file the typical database files All user objects will be added to it Gecdis allows you to create as many databases as desired So you can add a new database and change the current one To add or change a database 1 Inthe System menu click Settings User Objects and then Database Manag
252. specified You can remove a point selecting it and then clicking the Delete button You can insert other points of the area by entering a position in the field in the upper part of the dialog box and then clicking Insert 6 Click Refresh view to display the area in real time with the deleted and inserted points ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 121 amp i A L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 7 Click OK The new area is displayed Its borders are highlighted by small orange circles that specify the area has been created manually V 2 12 CHART PRESENTATION V 2 12 1 Simplified and Traditional Display You can also change the aspect of symbols to make the consultation of cells easier Indeed you can either choose to display the objects the way they are usually displayed on a paper chart Traditional symbols or in a simpler way Simplified symbols To choose between the traditional and simplified displays 1 Click the Charts menu point to Presentation Presentation and select your desired type of presentation For example the following symbol gt in traditional display mode will look like the following In simplified display mode Figure V 31 Chart with simplified symbols Figure V 32 Chart with traditional symbols V 2 12 2 Detail Level of Chart Objects Centre on Gwyn Ship Fe Orientation Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place a Scale Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom zoom l
253. stle Light Light characteristic long flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 10 Fadar transponder beacon Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Signal group E Radar wave length 0 03 x w Deleted Annotations Annotation Comment My first annotation Author Administ ator Created 09 07 2013 15 38 30 Deleted 090772013 15 45 06 Annotation Comment My second annotation Author Administ ator Created 09 07 2013 15 38 46 Deleted 090772013 15 45 06 Move object Annotate object Mark as deleted ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 xX L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 11 2 4 Move a punctual object To move a punctual object 1 Select the object in the chart 2 Inthe consultation window click the Move object button 3 The window that opens allows you to enter the new position of the object or an offset in terms of heading and distance between the current location of the object and its new location 4 Once the operation done click OK When an object of the official chart is moved the original chart object stays at the same location and is crossed out with an orange dash A new object is created at the selected location The new object is highlighted When an object created manually is moved the object position changes Original and new positions are mentioned in the Consultation window i A oe Cell 68200000 Position 46 2o 997 N
254. t Optionally check the Detailed description box to display in the window an explanation for all sentences Click Apply N OO P IV 6 2 6 Checking Transmitted Sentences You can check the sentences transmitted by a stream at the same time they are transmitted Input Output Pause Reset Text Hexa SELMA A TE MU fe de LLA B ee a SEIZDA ee Wi Oe 2013 2 0 77 SEIDPT 0 0 62 SEIGGA 25437 5038 12523 H 00205 07341 E 6 0 1 H H 66 SbIRNG 125437 4 5038 122523 H 00205 07341 E 19 4 67 7 050713 0 0 W E 15 SEIHDT 57 0 T 1C SETROT Val SW WG bil lle ee ON a be IR uO EMU tere Ue Ma LAL L To Ur ee ee Ee Sau ht Bish eae Lamiak E OK 5102 Ol ojo o Figure IV 35 Check transmitted sentences on a stream To check transmitted sentences 1 In the left hand list of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click the stream whose sentences you want to check E 2 Click in the first tab of the stream the left one A window opens Right click this window 4 Inthe pop up menu that opens click Output to check the transmitted sentences The list of all sentences is displayed GN 92 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 3 CREATING MOBILES AND FLEETS A mobile is the representation of a mobile object With Gecdis you can insert as many mobiles as desired It is possible to create different types of mobiles e Mobile
255. t Add Remove Programs 3 Select Gecdis in the list of programs and click Uninstall 4 An uninstallation wizard will guide you through the required steps ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 3 x LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 1 3 LAUNCHING AND CLOSING GECDIS My Documents My Computer ao f Y My Network Places e Recycle Bin e gt H Internet Seaxpert Explorer aS Connect to Ze Set Program Access and Defaults Ss Windows Update gt Loi Accessories Loi Startup Ss Documents d Internet Explorer EN Setti gt Outlook Express ettings Le Oracle YM VirtualBox Guest Additions gt gt Lose tts Seaxpert St Seaxpert on the Web d 203A per t Location C Program Files ixBlue Seaxpert stat 2 E a b i 8 15 45 Figure 4 Launching Gecdis Gecdis launching and closing are quite typical of Windows applications but you must be sure to have connected the dongle software on the computer To launch Gecdis 1 On the desktop system there is definitely a shortcut to launch Gecdis 2 Or otherwise in the Windows taskbar click Start Programs iXBlue then click the line corresponding to the product name as SeaXpert Gecds C to open the last menu and click again on the line product name 3 The welcome dialog box opens In the list of the User field select the user you want to log on and enter the password for this
256. t be able to see your mobile or fleet if the scale is inferior to 1 100000 5 Click the Label tab This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the Symbol tab 74 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 10 11 12 Track Symbol Label Pasttrack Vectors Miscellaneous vw Aisible w SCAMIN w ECDIS representation 100000 OK Cancel Figure IV 14 Configuring the Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Labels Check the Visible box if you want the label of your default mobile to be visible in the main view e If you haven t checked Visible you won t be able to see the label of your ship in the main view e lf you have checked Visible Choose whether you want your label to be transparent or not if you don t check Transparent the label will be highlighted Click the Past track tab This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the other tabs Track Symbol Label Fasttrack Yectors Miscellaneous w Misibles wv SCAMIN w ECDIS representation 100000 Duration min 5 Time tag rate min 1 OK Cancel Apply Figure IV 15 Configuring the Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Past Track Click Visible if you want the past track of the default mobile to be visible e If you haven t checked Visible you won t be able to see the mobile past track e lf you have checked Visible Select ECDIS representation or not depending on whether you want the display of your mobi
257. t display that have been previously set e Base level displays the ECDIS type events such as chart databases or position report e Standard level displays the base events alarms and some particular events such as Gecdis launch autopilot mode user log on etc e Full level displays all events Using them allows you to display only a part of all events that have been generated while using Gecdis to print only interesting events for example Display Base Standard All Filter Figure III 17 Levels of event display However if none of them meets your needs and you want for example to display some additional events of the Full level but not all of them you can custom the display of events To do so you need to check your desired events and uncheck the other ones In the filtering dialog box events are displayed as a list For each of them the ID and source are indicated You can only select the events that have already appeared in the black box If a new type of event occurs after the filter has been configured this event will be displayed by default in the black box You will be able to remove it from display later To select a level of event display 1 Inthe Black box dialog box click the desired level in the Display group zone To custom the display level of events 1 Inthe Black Box dialog box click the Filter button Id Source a 2002 IXMIoMobile 30026 IXMIoMobile 40002 IsMIoMobile 40006 IXMIoMobil
258. ted according the mobile true heading WITH HEAD UP IT TAKES THE VIEW IS MOTION CONTROLED ON A MOBILE OTHERWISE IT DOES NOT FOLLOW THE DIRECTION OF THE LATEST MOBILE USE ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 53 x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Warning You didg thoose to detect all the dangers Pa Le Figure Ill 12 Head up orientation e Leg up the view is oriented according the current leg route It is strongly recommended to use this mode only with route monitoring enabled Warning You didn t choose to detect all the dangers l l l 7 sl l I Figure Ill 13 Leg up orientation North up orientation is more powerful CJ To change the orientation you can e Use the Orientation menu from Display menu and select the mode Display vw Centre on Own Ship Fe Orientation Morth up FS w Relative motion Ctrl F2 Head up E Centre on Place Leg up Figure Ill 14 The orientation menu e Use the shortcuts for that see 1 2 1 page 6 54 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 xXSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IL 3 Alarms Alarms are used to draw the user s attention to an abnormal modification in the system status and or its content Alarms aim at alerting you when e The system has been altered e Data
259. ted planned route VII 3 6 SWITCHING IN ROUTE MONITORING When you launch the route monitoring mode on a planned route the Pilot window opens giving several useful pieces of information about the route While in route monitoring you can still change the properties ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 163 x 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual and planning of the route Along the route monitoring several alarms may occur e When you reach a wheel over the following message displays in the Alarms window Wheel over Waypoint x reached where x represents the waypoint number e f your ship exceeds the XTE the following alarm displays Max exceeded x nm where x represents the distance from XTE distance expressed in meters up to 1852 meters and then nautical miles e When the last waypoint is reached the following alarm displays Waypoint x reached To switch in route monitoring mode 1 Inthe Navigation menu click Start Track Keeping to display the route monitoring information To do so the ship must be inside the lane of the route 2 If you want to stop the route monitoring click Navigation and then Stop Track Keeping 3 When you switch to monitoring mode the Pilot view is displayed VII 3 7 THE PILOT VIEW This view includes the following items e TO name destination waypoint name TO NEXT course next leg course Corresponds to the Route field of the Route Properties dialog box This value is also indicated in red c
260. the following e Select the clearing line you want to delete and click the Delete context sensitive button on the right of the screen e Select the clearing line you want to delete right click it and click Delete in the pop up menu To move a Clearing line 1 Select the clearing line you want to move right click it and click Move in the pop up menu 2 Drag the mouse which is located in the head of the clearing line to change its position and bearing The NMT no more than or NLT no less than values change accordingly To rotate a clearing line 1 Select the clearing line you want to rotate right click it and click Rotate in the pop up menu 2 Drag the mouse which is located in the end of the clearing line to change its bearing ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 143 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VI 3Geographic Calculations Gecdis v8 User s Manual The Geographic Calculations module allows you to calculate the distance between 2 points You can get e The distance between two defined points Compute bearings and ranges option e The position of a point according to the coordinates of point of origin and a parameter of distance and bearing Compute B option Geographic Calculations Bearing Range Calculations Ar 51 15 41368N 002 03 40058E h B 50 47 25076N 000 37 80596E ck Rhumb Line Distance 60 959 NM Bearing 242 4497 Draw Rhumb Line Compute bearings and ranges Compute P Great Circl
261. the geographical north axis and the ship s headline j True Heading True Wind The wind vector in relation to the earth s surface For a moving object it is the vector sum of the apparent wind and the velocity of the object TTG Time To Go The time value used to reach either a waypoint or a wheel over TTG to wapiti The time estimated to reach the next waypoint TTG au wheel over The time estimated to reach the next wheel over TTM Tracked target The sentence that allows to acquire data associated to a tracked target message relative to the Own Ship Turn radius starboard The radius of the circle of a ship when turning starboard e g to reach the new leg of a route Update Update enabling management of the display of cartographic objects This option lets the user create new point objects create new chart areas annotate cartographic objects delete cartographic objects relocate point objects cancel updates by erasing them User Object Filter The operation that consists in selecting user objects with specific criteria Universal Polar Stereographic defines a conformal azimuthal projection and grid coordinates system used for both the northern and southern polar regions VBW The sentence that indicates the soeed on ground and on water Vertical Datum Geodesics applied at water level 30 different types of vertical datum VDR The sentence that indicates stream s speed and heading ISD M 038 B EN
262. the hard drive for the desired image by clicking button o1 PS W bh 30 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 KC L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual 7 Validate by clicking OK 11 4 2 CONTROLS The following list describes the various controls used to manage the configuration of toolbars e Use large buttons allows the use of large buttons 64x64 or small 82x32 This parameter affects the size of the toolbar and possibly the information bar Show tooltips controls whether a tooltip is displayed or not when the cursor hovers over a button Toolbar 1 Toolbar 2 allows you to select the toolbar to change Insert Button adds a button based on the location of the selected Delete deletes the current button gt moves to the left or right current button Button Menu Command selects the associated command with the button Button Image selects the image associated with the button from the library or browsing the hard drive Button Tooltip allows entering the tooltip associated with the button e Button With Separator adds a separator before the button ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 31 A 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 11 5 Alarms Configuring alarm display consists in choosing in the list of alarm groups the ones you want to display in the alarm window Regardless of the alarm window all alarms are archived and consultable in the black box This
263. the limits of a side of your area 2 Right click to end the area creation process 3 Inthe New Area dialog box enter a name for this area in the Name field and a date in the Date field General Alarms Points List Mame Date 1107 2013 15 24 21 Type Closed 4rea Spline Open Line Appearance Line Pattern ee E Colour Wi Comment OK Cancel Figure VII 26 Area properties dialog 4 Click the Closed Area radio button if you want your area to be closed and the Open Line radio button if you want your area to be opened 5 Inthe Appearance section choose a colour a pattern and a line for this area gr IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOUR SEE I 4 2 PAGE 17 6 Enter if you want a comment for this area You will be able to consult this comment in the area s consultation window if you select this area 7 Click the Alarms tab This tab must be filled in a logical way In the Send Alarm when zone do one of the following e Click The Own Ship if you want to send an alarm when the Own Ship crosses the zone ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 175 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Click A mobile in and select one of the mobile in the scrolling list of this field if you want to send an alarm when a mobile which is not the Own Ship crosses the area e Click Any Mobile if you want to send an alarm whenever a mobile crosses the zone 8 Check Ente
264. tion bar and pages windows toggle command See 1 3 1 6 page 12 Channel View allows to display close a leg up window toggle command to have a better appreciation on route monitoring or track keeping See VII 3 9 page 166 Pilot View allows to display close the pilot view toggle command Similarly to channel view but with a 3D aspect it is an example of a view added by an external module IXMRoutes See VII 3 7 page 164 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 ix L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES lll 7 The display context A display context is a screen configuration identifying a specific use of the software It is possible to save this specific configuration to display it later To give an example you may have decided to display the information windows but no chart overview in case you want to have maximum available space on screen Anytime you wish to skip to this configuration you will have to load the corresponding display context a Channelling is a specific use of display contexts A leg can be assigned to a specific display context For more details see VII 3 10 page 166 The management menu display contexts is composed of two parts e The first part consists of only one command that allows you to manage contexts e A second part that is automatically constructed according to the contexts added Each line of this part corresponds to a command to recall a context The new commands of the m
265. tivated AIS with true scaled outlines ECDIS mode Dangerous activated AIS with true scaled outlines IV 5 3 DEFINING A SPECIFIC APPEARANCE FOR A MOBILE OR A FLEET The appearance of a fleet is configured the same way as the appearance of a mobile To define the appearance of a fleet you must first access to the x Appearance dialog box x defining the name of your fleet VK kM This option is only possible in ECS mode To do so you have two possibilities 1 Click Mobile Mobile List select the fleet whose appearance you want to define and then click Fleet Appearance 2 Click Mobile Configuration select a fleet in the list and then click the Appearance button iXBlue DR Appearance i Track Symbol Label 1000000 DK Cancel Figure IV 17 Configuring the Specific Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Symbols 3 Check or uncheck the Uses default appearance box depending on whether you want to use or not the default appearance that you have defined for the mobiles see IV 5 1 page 74 e lf you have selected the Uses default appearance box The appearance that have been defined in the sub menu Appearance Mobiles gt Appearance gt Symbol tab will be defined e f you haven t selected the Uses default appearance box 4 Click Visible if you want the default mobile appearance to be visible e If you haven t checked Visible you won t be able to see the mobiles contained in your fleet e lf
266. tment not to re export the product without applying for an export license to the competent national authorities as set above This product cannot be exported or re exported to Cuba Syria North Korea Libya Sudan and Iran ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 lil A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT Bold Courier Italic SHARPER SENSES Text Usage Bold text is used for items you must select or click in the software It is also used for the field names used into the dialog box Text in this font denotes text or characters that you should enter from the keyboard the proper names of disk Drives paths directories programs functions filenames and extensions Italic text is the result of an action in the procedures Bold and italic Text in this font indicates a sequence to realize gt A Icons The Note icon indicates that the following information is of interest to the operator and should be read THE CAUTION ICON INDICATES THAT THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION SHOULD BE READ TO FORBID OR PREVENT PRODUCT DAMAGE THE WARNING ICON INDICATES THAT POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT FROM FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PROVIDED RECOMMENDATION ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 G By AS lA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Table of Contents l ee dl eng cess ctceseeensstonavoseesnsenencencnsseeseeencaeonsesscannssseussaeesseesnssusatensteseasssensentseseh 1 Li WE
267. to keys Each number corresponds to a shortcut key combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 i 23 29 L Caps A S F G H Enter Ins Home jPade Up Page Down Lock FETTITILIL a a a Figure 6 Keyboard and Shortcuts C e 2 Bm fmm Ip res HE Close view that has focus with the exception of the main view 6 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES O Skip to Head up mode esch Create a Man Over Board event 11 Select the next coulor mode NO Select the previous coulor mode LA Acknowledge an alarm g TI O esch Ti t 4 Shift Show Hide the alarm menu Maximize or restore the size of the main view O1 j esch Enter Validate left click Switch between mouse centre or chart consultation modes NI g Co g AN AN Co O O g Reduce the mobile s SOW Increase the mobile s SOW Ctrl NO Reduce the mobile s COW E Increase the mobile s COW E SI Ctrl Page TO 2 4 Down Reduce the mobile s depth 93 Ctrl Page TE 2 F Increase the mobile s depth 24 E M les L Reduce the mobile sl drift speed 25 E 2 wl Increase the mobile s drift speed 26 E Le No Reduce the mobile s drift course 27 E N L L Increase the mobile s drift course 28 IN Down Reduce the mobile s
268. traditional system You will then prefer to change the datum to have a perfect representation of the position of this object By default Gecdis uses the WGS84 VM The acronym of the selected datum is indicated in the main view title bar To change the datum 1 Inthe System menu click Settings and General configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Datum tab 3 In this tab you can see a short list of the main datum systems ED50 ETRS89 NAD27 NAD83 and WGS84 If you want to display all existing datums uncheck the Short List box 4 You can sort the datums in alphabetical order by acronym name country and ID clicking the column headings 5 Click your desired datum and click OK The acronym of the datum you have just selected is indicated in the main view title bar Security Miscellaneous User InterFace Identification Format Display Datum Toolbar Users Alarms G vw Short List 2 Ac Name Country ID EDU European 1950 MEAN FOR Austria Belgium Denm EURM ETRS89 European Terrestrial Reference Syst Global Definition ELIT HAD2 North American 1927 MEAN FOR CONUS HASC MADSS North American 1983 CONLS MARC Wlan Word Geodedic System 1984 Global Definition OK Cancel Figure II 5 Configuring Datum VK kM All parameters datum are from the special publication of the IHO S 60 id name values ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 29 x z3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT
269. u can import user data provided by another Gecdis application It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original Gecdis position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a Gecdis user object folder 1 Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then Gecdis database 2 Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s 3 In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window VII 2 4 3 Turbo Tactic Import You can import user data provided by another Gecdis application It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original Gecdis position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a Turbo Tactic user object folder 1 Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then Gecdis database 2 Click to browse the database or the folder with the user objeci s 3 In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window VII 2 4 4 MaxSea Import You can import user data provided by MaxSea It can be marks areas routes and tracks with
270. uipment position report Aids to navigation AtoN report Static data report This chapter presents the different equipments for managing mobile fleets D 3 1 SUMMARY TABLE Mobile type Format Manufacturer Sentence type ___ Mobile type Timeout meos Jee mseeg x ooo e TER ER 15 min cd 5 min NMEA Kelvin Hughes Ld NMEA Ryokuseisha Lo The timeout value is the default delay from which in case of non receipt of a new sentence for a mobile previously acquired it is automatically deleted 5 min 5 min l NMEA PTSAG PLEASE NOTE THAT THIS OWNER SENTENCE CAN EITHER BE USED FOR DECODING e IXSEA GAPS MOBILE OR EITHER OF THE GEONET TRAWL NET SEE D 4 4 AND D 4 5 D 3 2 NMEA INFORMATIONS TABLE Unlike XML Mobile format that is open the data acquired through the NMEA frames are etched in stone Here is a summary of the various informations and settings managed on a mobile based NMEA formats and derivatives Name pox foe xe Te 196 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Informations TL Sizes length beam conning offsets ze Mobile type target State E xore AS Orc nu num num TI am 1 nm X m m Geo position X Geo accuracy a po distance a O y O y JL Water temp Battery voltage X Submersion gt gt LL S S Altitude e x acquired value e c computed value e num
271. uired e Speed over ground e drift True wind bearing The wind bearing in relation to true north The value of this piece of information is dead reckoned the one given by a fixed sensor software acquired Apparent wind speed The wind speed relative to a mobile that is moving dead reckoned software acquired Apparent wind bearing The wind bearing in relation to the ship dead reckoned software acquired IV 6 2 STREAMS A stream is a continuous series of bits being transmitted down a transmission line In other words a stream allows your computer or your program to communicate with other programs or devices passing data into and out Gecdis includes three types of streams communication ports files and networks Each of them corresponds to a particular communicational need via external devices communication ports your own machine files or other machines network IV 6 2 1 Adding and Configuring a Communication Port Usually communication ports in your machine are linked to external devices You can configure Gecdis to receive data coming from these devices The sentences are transmitted to the software for them to be analysed Input Output amp Mobile Configuration a System a SerialPort Input Parameters Spying o d COMI GPS SE E Input datum a COM1 Commer GPS II NMEA output R vw output Baud Aate 4500 File Emission d EECH Parity i ZS NETI ZIL No parity MM ER TCP1 G erve
272. ur S Data Bits D h Bo dee E mc ES ER ARPA Range M Stop Bits 1 4 a Add Delete Close Figure IV 23 Information on Communication Ports To add and configure a communication port 1 Click Add and then Stream 2 A list of all available streams is displayed In this list click the communication port you want to add 3 The name of the communication port is displayed in the left hand list On the right part of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box the Windows default configuration for this 86 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 er L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES communication port is displayed We advise you to change the values if they are different from the ones in the above dialog box Baud rate 4800 Data Bits 8 Parity No Parity Stop Bits 1 4 On the Comment field optionally enter a comment about the communication port For example if your communication port is a GPS you can enter GPS in this field What you have entered will be inserted into brackets in the left hand list just opposite the name of the communication port see IV 6 2 6 page 92 e 5 If you click aj data incoming from or outgoing to the communication port which has been added are displayed Right click this window The same menu as above the window is displayed Input OUEOuE Pause Reset Text Format Hexadecimal Format Figure IV 24 Pop up menu That Checks Input amp Output of COM Ports e I
273. us User Interface Tooltips in chart views v Enable tooltips in chart views Activate window under cursor Do not display tooltips for areas Turbo Win mode Display commands in tooltips Never When mouse is inside Always LK Cancel Figure II User interface configuration To configure the user interface 1 Click the System menu Settings General Configuration and then the User Interface tab 2 Check the parameters you want to use see II 9 1 and II 9 2 3 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply 11 9 1 TOOLTIPS IN CHART VIEWS You can define rules to display a tooltip when you pass over an object with the mouse in the chart views ixBlue x Date 2013 06 25 07 51 25 j e ES Comment wt EW Size 4 375 NM ys NS Size 1 391 NM ra Closed shape d Colour Ve Line Pattern Figure II 19 Tooltip in chart view Main parameters e Enable tooltips in chart views enable or disable the automatic display of the tooltip e Do not display tooltips for areas enable or disable the display of the tooltip when the mouse cursor is inside the area if the cursor is on an area point or border the tooltip will be displayed independently of this parameter ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 39 X 3LUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Folder ixBlue Date Area 2013 06 25 07 51 25 Comment EW Size 4 375 NM g NS Size 1 3
274. used to be in the chart database When an update is applied the line below is followed by the list of modified objects with the type of modification There are several kinds of possible changes o Insertion INSERT o Modification MODIFY the modification can change either the geometry of the object or its attributes o Deletion DELETE V 2 6 RESETING THE DATABASE To reseting databse 1 Inthe Charts Database dialog box click Reset Database to restart with an empty database The current database is thus sent to the recycle bin V 2 7 CENTRING THE CHART AREA ON A CELL To centring the chart area on a cell 1 Inthe Charts tab of the Charts Database dialog box click the cell you wish to centre on and then click Center on Cell or double click the cell 2 The chart area is then centred on the selected cell with its compilation scale V 2 8 IMPORTING DELETING USER PERMITS The permit file license is a txt file that is required by the application to install all purchased charts This file via USB key CD mail etc is delivered when purchasing official charts 112 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 xX L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES lt contains as many lines as the number of purchased charts E Code required to encrypt the chart EATE 20070110 13 08 q YP AL HS ON 1 WT HEE aa eee BES3WLENK2 007 040IHBLE93D08 FOFDD229B1E93D87FOFDD22E01lB63D3023E281F9 OU DEZ 10002007040
275. user in the Password field id Choose a user and enter password User Administrator Password OK Exit Figure I 5 Launching Gecdis 4 Click OK 4 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 ar L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DE EP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES a At first start or if you have set a password or more users you will identifer just after the splash screen to continue launching the software Otherwise the identification step is ignored To close Gecdis 1 Click System and then Exit 2 A confirmation window is displayed Click Yes Before closing the software saves all the parameters necessary to restart in the same state ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 5 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES LZ How to Use the Equipment 1 2 1 THE KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Shortcut keys offer you another way to accomplish common tasks In many cases shortcut keys help you to work faster Using a shortcut key usually consists in pressing and holding one key while pressing a second key THE CONCEPT OF ACTIVE WINDOW IS IMPORTANT FOR MANAGING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS PARTICULARLY WITH DEAD RECKONING CONTROLS ON A MOBILE ARE INTERCEPTED ONLY BY THE MAIN VIEW eo SEE II 9 2 1 PAGE 40 TO CONFIGURE THE ACTIVE WINDOW Gecdis standard shortcuts The following is a list of the shortcut keys currently available in Gecdis In the following keyboard picture shortcuts numbers have been assigned
276. uts for that see 1 2 1 page 6 48 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 6 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual llI 3 Centring on a place Wherever your main view is you can centre it on a specific place anywhere on Earth The places can also be edited deleted etc VM kM Centring on a place disable the motion mode on a mobile if it was active To centre the main view on a place 1 Click Display and then Centre on Place Centre on Position 2291 S 00002N 114 10 9999SE P Ok Scale LI 250000 Cancel Places Genova gt Mew Gibraltar Gironde Pilot galfe de Fos Edit e Delete Figure III 3 Centring on a Place 2 In the Centre on Place dialog box some default places are specified Select the place on which you want the main view to be centred 3 Optionally in the Scale field change the scale you want to display the place with This main view will be centred on this place with the scale you have just specified 4 Click OK l IF YOU HAVE SPECIFIED A SCALE ALL FUTURE PLACES YOU WILL CENTRE ON WILL HAVE THE SAME SCALE e IF YOU DO NOT CHANGE IT To add a place to centre on 1 Click Display Centre on Place and then New Mame Position 51 02 10691N 001 34 26500E KN Scale Current if 250000 OK Cancel Figure III 4 New place 2 In the Geographic Place dialog box enter the name of the new place its position and choose your desired scale 3 Click OK ISD M 038 B EN 12 11
277. v 18 0 kn True heading 275 99 Depth 48 5 m gt Additional Information gt Parameters Cente Fix Position Hide Appearance Configuration Bear ing Range Line Start Track Figure 1 20 Consultation window Those buttons are not identical they depend on the selected object For example a route will be the only object with an available button called Planned Route this button allows to select the route as the one to be monitored 1 3 1 7 2 List windows The list windows e g list of user objects allow you to manage lists that are sorted out in a hierarchical way Generally they consist of e A menu bar above e A tree that gathers all the folders of the lists on the left e The contents of the element which is selected in the tree The contents of these kinds of windows are more likely to fit across widthways That s why they default below in the screen 14 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 AN L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 3 1 8 Pop up menus A pop up menu is a menu that appears on the screen when you right click and whose options correspond to the current clicked object When you right click the main view on empty area a pop up menu displays this menu includes some commands such as the ability to change user Other pop up menus can be displayed depending on the part of the screen in which you have clicked e g in the Channel window or circumstances right click on a se
278. vail Favoris r seau Nom de l objet Type d objets C GB4z955H C GB4z9551 5 GB4z9558 C GB5Z945E 3 6B52945 cB5z9554 68579558 G cb6z9558 6810002F 68140118 5G814011R G814012R CO GB14020R GB140218 C GB14021R 568140248 G814024R C GB140648 GB14064R CD GB14070R C 6B21017N 68210175 68221824 5 6B24625E qB24625W C 6B24632E 6824632 C GB304634 C GB30463B 5 GB8307184 C GB30718E G8307244 CD 6B30724C C GB30724D 68307514 68307518 C GB30752A 68307528 C GB307664 Gecdis v8 User s Manual 68307661 C GB30766 C GB30766 C GB30766 D GB30862 2 GB308621 2 GB308631 O GB30863 68316901 6831769 56831769 68317691 C GB33269 aI ZU re ENC Cell Files nnn sl _Annuler Figure V 13 Importing S57 file ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 Import Folder A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 4 GETTING AN IMPORT REPORT Each time you are proceeding to an import of cells a Last Import tab displays in the Charts Database dialog box The Last Import pane describes the result of the process import and the result of an update cell by cell Charts Databas Charts History Permits SA Certficate Last Import 68 celKs imported 482 update s applied 0 celts deleted 0 file s rejected E5400483 001 ES 3 002 3 002 Status of the import Details of the cell content 3 issued by ES
279. with red d character Information is displayed with different colours depending on their accurateness e High and normal quality information is displayed in green e Invalid information is displayed in red 12 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 x L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Undefined information is displayed in gray XX XX XXX XXX XX XXX BEAR L AAA DIST x xxxx NM IIG AA OH OW ETA XXIXX IXX Prof CPA X XXXX NM Figure 16 Critiacl information window This information bar can be displayed either on the chart or in the information bar in the right hand side of the screen When displayed on the chart you can move it to any position on the chart area with the mouse lt gt IN ECDIS MODE THIS WINDOW IS AUTOMATICALLY FORCED INTO THE RIGHT HAND SIDE OF THE SCREEN 1 3 1 6 2 The Information Bar Allows to display previously selected pieces of information that are computed or come from sensors To display the information bar you must select the corresponding command in the View menu You can superpose several bars creating bars by themes for example one bar may stand for Own Ship s information and another one for information about a route that is monitored When a piece of information is not available incorrect or nonexistent the corresponding field is not filled in Pieces of information are displayed with different colours depending on their accurateness e High quality pieces of informati
280. y clicking Base Standard or Full 3 If desired you can save the current setting by clicking Save Display as When you save a filter it is added to the custom ones in the Chart Display menu 4 Click OK to save this filter ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 123 4 L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES FILTER WILL REPLACE THE FORMER ONE YOU CANNOT ASSIGN BASE STANDARD AND COMPLET TO IF YOU SAVE A FILTER WITH A NAME THAT HAS ALREADY BEEN ASSIGNED TO ANOTHER FILTER THE NEW D CUSTOMIZED FILTERS To select a customized display 1 In the Charts menu point to Chart Display Under the separator that follows the three default level displays there is the list of the other filters you have created 2 Click the desired filter When you select a filter a check mark is displayed in front of it V 2 12 3 The Presentation Library Gecdis uses official S52 presentation to draw ENC charts Used presentation library is replaceable but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personal and type approval authorities As a user you can get with the used presentation by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1 which is included into Gecdis Note that it behaves as any ENC chart and it follows your selections The presentation library is the list of symbols defined in the ECDIS standard that is considered as the reference for symbols It contains 12 screens which are shown in the Appendix C of this manual To op
281. y represent 25 50 100 250 or 500 metres of this view Channel iew 1 15 000 500 m 262 x au didn tychooserto detect all the dangers TO name WU WOD 3 190NM He ading to steer 29037 WOTTG 3h11min Ae lt lt 302 2m WOT 12 32 46 DH 3 a Sen g gusse A Ve 4 H ee 18 ll 7 50 37 S0N E IT 0 M MM ER nl GEET eee ras Figure VII 16 Ser Furthermore an alarm warns you when the distance from your ship to this wheel over is equal to 2 5 times the length of a square of the grid For example if the grid is configured to 100 metres the alarm will be displayed when approaching the wheel over by 250 metres This view includes the following items e TO name destination waypoint name e Heading to steer heading to steer to follow the selected route This value takes into account the drift e XTE current cross track error from Own Ship position to the route lane This value can be preceded by lt lt if the ship must steer to the left to reach the route or gt gt if the ship must steer to the right e WOD wheel over distance from the current Own Ship position to the wheel over line e WOTTG wheel over time to go corresponding to WOD and Own Ship SOG e WOT UTC date and time of arrival to wheel over line according UTC SOG and WOD To change the scale or the grid of the view 1 Inthe View menu click Channel View 2 Right click the channel view A pop up menu is displayed that allows you to change the
282. yed For more details about this window please see IV 6 2 1 page 86 Click Apply ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 el ix L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 2 2 2 The TCP Stream TCP is a protocol that allows to connect a transmitter and a receiver This is a direct connection between two machines So the sentences that will be sent to several machines will have to be sent once for each machine The advantage of this protocol is that data is completely transmitted if data is missing or erroneous messages are transmitted once again TCP is then used if it is important to receive data To implement TCP you should enter a stream number Port field on which the server and the clients will be connected and exchange data and optionally the IP or the servers name Server Address field for client machines for the server this field must be empty e et System a TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying 2 Nd COMI GPS E NET UDP Comment SSServeur E TCR1 S55erveur oe Wa GH ON Input datum e EE NMEA output GU ML output Port 1001 Server Address 192 165 16 53 ia gt File Emission i d UTC E lf ARPA Range hd 4 Add Delete Close Figure IV 27 TCP stream client configured with an IP address ER S System a TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying D d COM GPS ER NET UDP d TCP1 Comment EG Gerveu G E TEPI 555erveur m je Si Input datum 1001 d E NMEA output oL
283. you have checked Visible 5 Select ECDIS Representation or not depending on whether you want the appearance of your fleet to ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 79 NW L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES follow the ECDIS standard representation e If you have selected ECDIS representation the mobiles of the fleet will be represented as defined in the ECDIS standard e If you haven t selected ECDIS representation 6 Select a colour and a symbol clicking on the arrow of these fields and check the Expanded box if you want the fleet to be expanded its size will be twice larger HB wi als b ee HE TE TESTGA Oi aieipieleaiGa kk Figure IV 18 Symbols menu E list of RE is as follows Symbol Name Symbol Name pe me GE DEN DEE ien nie GE ie nie GE DECHE EE 80 ISD M 038 B EN 12 11 2013 A L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual SIGHT SHARPER SENSES SUB SURFACE Hostile SUB SURFACE Neutral SUB SURFACE Friendly SUB SURFACE Unknown ae If you choose M as the symbol for a mobile and that mobile has identification information the identification number will be indicated instead The symbol will not be drawn if the mobile or fleet length is superior to 12 mm 7 Click the Label tab This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the tab Symbol XBlue DR Appearance o M Track Symbol Label wv Visible w CAMIN w ECDIS representation 100000

Gecdis v8

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents